Class Series Pgrman, 88 2316 01 RevC Class_series_programmers_manual_c Programmers Manual C

User Manual: class_series_programmers_manual_c datamax

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 236

DownloadClass Series Pgrman, 88-2316-01 RevC Class_series_programmers_manual_c Programmers Manual C
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
Class Series
Programmer’s Manual
Corporate Headquarters
4501 Parkway Commerce Blvd.
Orlando, Fl 32808
Phone: 407-578-8007
Fax: 407-578-8377

Asia-Pacific
19 Loyang Way
#01-01 CILC Building
Singapore 508724
Phone: +65 542-2611
Fax: +65 542-3611

Datamax International
Herbert House
12 Elizabeth Way, Pinnacles
Harlow, Essex CM19 5FE UK
Phone: +44 1279 772200
Fax: +44 1279 424448

CG Times (based upon Times New Roman), CG Triumvirate, MicroType, and TrueType are trademarks
of the AGFA Monotype Corporation.
PCL, Intellifont, and HP Laser JetII are trademarks of the Hewlett Packard Corporation.
Macintosh is a trademark of the Apple Corporation.
Windows is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.
All other brand and product names are trademarks, service marks, registered trademarks, or registered
service marks of their respective companies.
Information in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on
the part of Datamax Corporation. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or
by any means, for any purpose other than the purchaser’s personal use, without the expressed written
permission of Datamax Corporation.

© 2004 by Datamax Corporation
Part Number: 88-2316-01
Revision C

Contents
1

Overview
Who Should Use This Manual ....................................................................................... 1
Scope of this Manual ..................................................................................................... 1
General Conventions..................................................................................................... 3
Computer Entry and Display Conventions..................................................................... 3
Typical Data Flow Sequence......................................................................................... 3

2

Control Code Command Functions
Introduction.................................................................................................................... 7
Attention-Getters ........................................................................................................... 7

3

Immediate Command Functions
Introduction.................................................................................................................... 9
SOH #

Reset ............................................................................................................ 9

SOH A

Send ASCII Status String.............................................................................. 9

SOH B

Toggle Pause.............................................................................................. 10

SOH C

Stop/Cancel ................................................................................................ 11

SOH D

SOH Shutdown ........................................................................................... 11

SOH E

Send Batch Quantity................................................................................... 12

SOH F

Send Status Byte ........................................................................................ 12

SOH U

Update System Database with Current Database ...................................... 12

i

4

System Level Command Functions
Introduction.................................................................................................................. 13
STX A

Set Time and Date...................................................................................... 13

STX a

Enable Feedback Characters ..................................................................... 14

STX B

Get Printer Time and Date Information ....................................................... 14

STX c

Set Continuous Paper Length..................................................................... 15

STX d

Set Double Buffer Mode.............................................................................. 15

STX E

Set Quantity For Stored Label .................................................................... 16

STX e

Select Edge Sensor .................................................................................... 16

STX F

Form Feed .................................................................................................. 16

STX f

Set Form Stop Position (Backfeed Command) ........................................... 17

STX G

Print Last Label Format............................................................................... 17

STX I

Input Image Data ........................................................................................ 18

STX i

Scalable Font Downloading ........................................................................ 19

STX J

Set Pause for Each Label ........................................................................... 19

STX K

Extended-System Commands .................................................................... 19

STX k

Test RS-232 Port ........................................................................................ 20

STX L

Enter Label Formatting Command Mode .................................................... 20

STX M

Set Maximum Label Length ........................................................................ 20

STX m

Set Printer To Metric Mode ......................................................................... 20

STX n

Set Printer to Imperial Mode ....................................................................... 21

STX O

Set Start of Print (SOP) Position................................................................. 21

STX o

Cycle Cutter ................................................................................................ 22

ii

5

STX P

Set Printer to Character (HEX) Dump Mode ............................................... 22

STX p

Controlled Pause ........................................................................................ 22

STX Q

Clear All Modules........................................................................................ 22

STX q

Clear Module .............................................................................................. 23

STX R

Ribbon Saver On/Off................................................................................... 23

STX r

Select Reflective Sensor............................................................................. 24

STX S

Set Feed Rate............................................................................................. 24

STX s

Set Single Buffer Mode............................................................................... 24

STX T

Print Dot Pattern Test Label........................................................................ 25

STX t

Test DRAM Memory Module....................................................................... 25

STX U

Label Format String Replacement Field...................................................... 26

STX V

Software Switch Settings ............................................................................ 27

STX v

Request Firmware Version ......................................................................... 28

STX W

Request Memory Module Information ......................................................... 29

STX w

Test Flash Memory Module ........................................................................ 30

STX X

Set Default Module ..................................................................................... 30

STX x

Delete File from Module.............................................................................. 31

STX Y

Output Sensor Values................................................................................. 31

STX y

Select Font Symbol Set .............................................................................. 32

STX Z

Print Configuration and Dot Pattern Labels................................................. 32

STX z

Pack Module ............................................................................................... 32

Extended System-Level Command Functions
Introduction.................................................................................................................. 33

iii

STX K

Memory Configuration................................................................................. 33

STX Kb

Backfeed Time Delay.................................................................................. 34

STX KC

Get Configuration........................................................................................ 35

STX Kc

Configuration Set ........................................................................................ 36

STX KD

Database Configuration .............................................................................. 59

STX Kd

Set File as Factory Default.......................................................................... 60

STX KE

Character Encoding .................................................................................... 60

STX KF

Select Factory Defaults............................................................................... 61

STX Kf

Set Present Distance .................................................................................. 62

STX Kp

Module Protection....................................................................................... 63

STX KQ Query Memory Configuration...................................................................... 64
STX Kq

Query Memory Configuration...................................................................... 66

STX KR

Reset Memory Configuration ...................................................................... 66

STX Kr

Resettable Counter Reset........................................................................... 67

STX KS

Memory Configuration, Scalable Font Cache ............................................. 67

STX KV

Verifier Enable/Disable ............................................................................... 67

STX KW Memory Configuration, Printable Label Width............................................. 67
STX Kx
6

Delete Configuration File ............................................................................ 68

Label Formatting Command Functions
Introduction.................................................................................................................. 69
:

Set Cut By Amount ..................................................................................... 69

A

Set Format Attribute.................................................................................... 70

B

Bar code Magnification ............................................................................... 71

iv

C

Set Column Offset Amount ......................................................................... 71

c

Set Cut By Amount ..................................................................................... 72

D

Set Dot Size Width and Height ................................................................... 72

E

Terminate Label Formatting Mode and Print Label..................................... 73

e

Recall Printer Configuration ........................................................................ 73

F

Advanced Format Attributes ....................................................................... 73

f

Set Present Speed...................................................................................... 74

G

Place Data in Global Register..................................................................... 74

H

Enter Heat Setting ...................................................................................... 75

J

Justification ................................................................................................. 75

M

Select Mirror Mode...................................................................................... 76

m

Set Metric Mode.......................................................................................... 76

n

Set Inch (Imperial) Mode............................................................................. 76

P

Set Print Speed........................................................................................... 77

p

Set Backfeed Speed ................................................................................... 77

Q

Set Quantity Of Labels To Print .................................................................. 78

R

Set Row Offset Amount .............................................................................. 78

r

Recall Stored Label Format ........................................................................ 79

S

Set Slew Speed .......................................................................................... 79

s

Store Label Format In Module .................................................................... 80

T

Set Field Data Line Terminator ................................................................... 80

U

Mark Previous Field as a String Replacement Field ................................... 81

X

Terminate Label Formatting Mode.............................................................. 81

v

y

Select Font Symbol Set .............................................................................. 82

z

Zero (Ø) Conversion to “0”.......................................................................... 82

+ (>)

Make Last Field Entered Increment Numeric (Alphanumeric)..................... 83

- (<)

Make Last Field Entered Decrement Numeric (Alphanumeric) ................... 84

^

Set Count by Amount.................................................................................. 85

Special Label Formatting Command Functions ........................................................... 85

7

STX S

Recall Global Data And Place In Field................................................... 86

STX T

Print Time and Date............................................................................... 86

Font Loading Command Functions
Introduction.................................................................................................................. 89

8

*c###D

Assign Font ID Number............................................................................... 89

)s###W

Font Descriptor ........................................................................................... 89

*c###E

Character Code .......................................................................................... 90

(s#W

Character Download Data........................................................................... 90

Generating Label Formats
Introduction.................................................................................................................. 91
Format Record Commands ......................................................................................... 91
Generating Records .................................................................................................... 92
The Structure of a Record ........................................................................................... 92
Record Structure Types............................................................................................... 96
Internal Bit-Mapped Fonts......................................................................................... 96
Smooth Font, Font Modules, and Downloaded Bit-Mapped Fonts............................ 96

vi

Scalable Fonts .......................................................................................................... 97
Bar Codes................................................................................................................. 98
Images ...................................................................................................................... 99
Graphics ................................................................................................................... 99
Lines and Boxes .................................................................................................... 99
Polygons.............................................................................................................. 100
Circles ................................................................................................................. 101
Fill Patterns ...................................................................................................... 101
Examples ......................................................................................................... 102
Advanced Format Attributes ...................................................................................... 103
Appendix A
ASCII Control Chart................................................................................................... 107

Appendix B
Sample Programs ...................................................................................................... 109
VB Application to Send RAW Data via a Windows Printer Driver ............................. 114
Appendix C
Available Fonts – Sizes, References, and Samples .................................................. 119
Appendix D
Reset Codes.............................................................................................................. 125

Appendix E
Single Byte Symbol Sets ........................................................................................... 127

vii

Appendix F
Bar Code Summary Data .......................................................................................... 137
Bar Code Default Widths and Heights ....................................................................... 139
Appendix G
Bar Code Details ....................................................................................................... 141
Appendix H
Font Mapping - Single and Double Byte Characters.................................................. 179
Appendix I
Symbol Sets and Character Maps............................................................................. 181
Symbol Set Selection ................................................................................................ 181
Double-Byte Symbols, Chinese, Kanji and Korean.................................................... 183
Appendix J
The General Purpose Input Output (GPIO) Port........................................................ 185
GPIO Configuration (M-Class)................................................................................... 185
GPIO-1 Configuration (I-Class, W-Class) .................................................................. 187
GPIO-2 Configuration (A-Class) ................................................................................ 188
Appendix K
Resolutions, Module Identifiers, Maximum Field, Column & Character Values ......... 191
Appendix L
Speed Ranges........................................................................................................... 193

viii

Appendix M
Commands by Function............................................................................................. 195
Appendix N
Class Series DPL Constraint Cross-Reference ......................................................... 197

Appendix O
Image Loading........................................................................................................... 203
Appendix P
UPC-A and EAN-13: Variable Price/Weight Bar Codes............................................. 205

Appendix Q
International Language Print Capability Programming Examples.............................. 207
Appendix R
Plug and Play IDs ...................................................................................................... 215

Appendix S
Bar Code Symbology Information Sources................................................................ 217
Glossary ..................................................................................................................... 219

ix

x

Overview

Who Should Use This Manual
This manual is intended for programmers who wish to create their own label production software.
Operators without programming experience may prefer to use a label-creation software package. For
programming information on models not covered in this document, a copy may be downloaded from our
web site at http//www.datamaxcorp.com.

Scope of this Manual
This manual, arranged alphabetically by command, explains in detail Datamax Programming Language
(DPL) and its related uses in the writing, loading and storing of programs for the control and production
of label formats (designs) using the following Datamax printer models:
•

A-Class

•

E-Class (Non-Display)

•

I-Class

•

M-Class (Display-Equipped and Non-Display models)

•

W-Class

Model distinctions, including specific printer configurations (i.e., Display-Equipped or Non-Display
Models) and / or equipment types (e.g., I-Class GPIO-1, graphics display, etc.), will be indicated in
this text to differentiate command compatibility. The appendices of this manual also contain details
that cannot be ignored. The use of any command will require checking for possible exclusionary
conditions.
þ Notes: (1) The commands in this manual apply to printer Application (firmware) Version 7.24 or greater (see
KC for more information).
(2) Programming information for the S-Class printer, as well as the Datamax legacy line of printers, can
be found in the DPL Programmer’s Manual (part number 88-2051-01). For backward compatibility
purposes, the Class Series of printers will ignore commands no longer processed; Appendix N lists these
commands.
(3) References to ‘menu settings’ refer either to the printer’s internal set-up menu, or to the printer’s
menu driven display system; please consult to the appropriate Operator’s Manual for details.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

1

Overview

This manual contains the following chapters and appendices.

&

OVERVIEW on page 1
Contents, organization, and conventions used in this manual; also includes a typical dataflow
sequence for the printer.

&

CONTROL CODE COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 7
Description of the attention-getter characters necessary for the printer to receive a command
sequence, and available alternate characters and line terminators.

&

IMMEDIATE COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 9
Description of the commands, listed alphabetically, that perform status queries and printer control
commands.

&

SYSTEM-LEVEL COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 13
Description of the commands, listed alphabetically, that control the printer and allow scalable font
and image downloads.

&

EXTENDED SYSTEM-LEVEL COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 33
Description of the commands, listed alphabetically, that control the printer.

&

LABEL FORMATTING COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 69
Description of commands, listed alphabetically, that control the position of text and images on the
media, print or store, and end the formatting process.

&

FONT LOADING COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 89
Description of commands, listed alphabetically, used when downloading font data in PCL-4
compatible bit-maps.

&

GENERATING LABEL FORMATS on page 91
Description of the structure of records, the different types, and their use in generating label formats.

&

APPENDICES A THROUGH S on pages 107 through 217
These contain details that cannot be ignored including various tables, programming examples,
printer default values, and bar code symbology details. See the Table of Contents for specific
content information.

&

GLOSSARY on page 219
Definitions of words, abbreviations, and acronyms used in this manual.

2

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Overview

General Conventions
These are some of the conventions followed in this manual:
•

On the header of each page, the name of the chapter.

•

On the footer of each page, the page number and the title of the manual.

•

Names of other manuals referenced are in Italics.

•

Notes are added to bring your attention to important considerations, tips or helpful suggestions.

•

Boldface is also used to bring your attention to important information.

•

This manual refers to IBM-PC based keyboard command characters for access to the ASCII character
set. Systems based on different formats (e.g., Apple’s Macintosh) should use the appropriate
keyboard command to access the desired ASCII character. See Appendix A for the ASCII character
set.

Computer Entry and Display Conventions
Command syntax and samples are formatted as follows:
•

The Courier font in boldface indicates the DPL command syntax, and Italics are used to indicate the
command syntax parameters.

•

Regular Courier font indicates sample commands, files and printer responses.

•

Square brackets [ ] around something indicates that it is optional.

•

 is used to identify the line termination character. Other strings placed between < > in this
manual represent the character of the same ASCII name, and are single-byte hexadecimal values
(e.g., , , and <0x0D> equal 02, 0D, and 0D, respectively).

•

Hexadecimal values are often displayed in ‘C’ programming language conventions (e.g., 0x02 = 02
hex, 0x41 = 41 hex, etc.)

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

3

Overview

Typical Dataflow Sequence
The typical dataflow sequence is summarized in the following bullets and detailed in the table below.
Printer Commands data is transmitted to the printer as shown in the table from left to right, top to bottom.
•

Status commands

•

Configuration commands

•

Download commands

•

Label format

•

Status commands

•

Label reprint commands

•

Memory cleanup
Printer Commands

Description
“Status” commands: Get
Status, Request Memory
Module Storage
Information…

Notes
Optional, bidirectional
communication required
for these commands.

O220
n
V0

“Configuration”
commands, download
image…

See Kc to reduce
configuration commands
transferred

D
IApImagenameimage data...data


“Download” commands,
image, fonts…

RAM (temporary) or
Flash (semi-permanent)
memory

L

Begin label

D11

Label Header record

131100000500050Typical text field 01

Label Formatting Data
record –
Object type, orientation,
position, data

Existing label formats
may be recalled. Label
header records are not
required

Q0001

Label Quantity

E

Label Terminate record

A

Status command

Optional, bidirectional
communication required
for these commands.

U01new data for field 01

Reprint with New Data
Records

Used for fast re-prints

Memory cleanup

Typically used for
temporary storage

A
WG

E0005
G
xImagename
zA

4

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Overview

Commands are available for retrieving stored label formats, updating data and adding new data. These
techniques are used for increasing throughput. See G, Label Recall Command ‘r’, and Label Save
Command ‘s’.
Typical commands used in the various stages shown above are listed in the tables that follow.

Configuration Commands
The following table lists some commands useful in controlling printer configuration. These
commands are generally effective only for the current power-up session; toggling power restores the
default configuration. See Kc for changes to the default power-up configuration. Changing the
default power-up configuration and saving objects in printer Flash memory can reduce the data
transmitted for each label and therefore improve throughput.
Configuration
Name
Command
A
Set Date and Time

Function
Set Date and Time

d

Set Double Buffer Mode

c

Set Continuous Paper Length Must be 0000 for gap media; not used for reflective media

e

Set Edge Sensor

Setup for gap or registration hole type stock

Kf

Set Present Distance

Determines label stop position, head relative. f edge
sensor relative equivalent command, older models

Kc

Configuration Set

Determines default power-up configuration

F

Send Form Feed

Sets the stop position of the printed label

M

Set Maximum Label Length

Length to search for next gap or reflective mark; not used
with continuous media

m

Set to Metric Mode

Subsequent measurements interpreted in metric, most units
mm/10. Label equivalent command can be used

n

Set to Inch Mode

Subsequent measurements interpreted in inches, most units
in/100, Label equivalent command can be used

O

Set Start of Print Position

Effect is not on label immediately following command since
media position is at Start of Print between labels; K
default position relative ± 64 in/100 maximum deviation

S

Set Feed Rate

Blank label movement speed

V

Software Switch

Enable optional hardware, cutter, present sensor

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Force generation of multiple memory copies of label format;
usually not used

5

Overview

Download Commands
Download
Command
I

Name

Function

Download Image

Download Image to selected memory module

i

Download Scalable Font

Download Scalable Font to selected memory module



Download Bitmapped Font

Download Bitmapped Font to selected memory module

Label Header Commands
These commands determine how the label formatting occurs, effect print quality and quantity. They
are typically issued immediately following the L start of the label format. The Format
Attribute (A) and the Offset (C, R) commands can be changed at any point between format records to
achieve desired effects.
Label Header
Command
A

6

Name
Set Format Attribute

C

Column Offset

D

Set Width and Dot Size

H

Set Heat Setting

M

Set Mirror Mode

P

Set Print Speed

P

Set Backup Speed

Q

Set Quantity

R

Set Row Offset

S

Set Slew Speed

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Control Code Command Functions

Introduction
The printer requires a special “attention-getter” character in order to receive a command sequence,
informing the printer that it is about to receive a command and the type of command it will be. Control
Commands, System-Level Commands, and Font Loading Commands have their own unique attentiongetter, followed by a command character that directs printer action.

Attention-Getters
The attention-getters (e.g., “SOH”) are standard ASCII control labels that represent a one character control
code (i.e., ^A or Ctrl A). Appendix A contains the entire ASCII Control Code Chart.
Attention-Getter For:
Immediate Commands
System-Level Commands
Font Loading Commands

ASCII Character
SOH
STX
ESC

Decimal Value
1
2
27

HEX Value
01
02
1B

Table 2-1: Control Code Listings

Alternate Control Code Modes
For systems unable to transmit certain control codes, Alternate Control Code Modes are available.
Configuring the printer to operate in an Alternate Control Code Mode (selected via the Setup Menu, the
Kc command or, where applicable, the KD command) requires the substitution of Standard
Control Characters with Alternate Control Characters in what otherwise is a normal data stream.
Control Character
SOH
STX
CR
ESC
“Count By” [1]
[1]

Standard
0x01
0x02
0x0D
0x1B
0x5E

Alternate
0x5E
0x7E
0x0D
0x1B
0x40

Alternate 2
0x5E
0x7E
0x7C
0x1B
0x40

Custom
User Defined
User Defined
User Defined
User Defined
User Defined

Command Type
Control
System
Line Termination
Font Loading
Label Formatting

See Label Formatting Commands, ^ set count by amount.

Table 2-2: Alternate Control Code Listings
þ Note: Throughout this manual , , , , and ^, will be used to indicate the control codes.
The actual values will depend on whether standard or alternate control codes are enabled for the
particular application.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

7

Control Code Command Functions

Alternate Line Terminator Example
Alternate Control Codes provide for substitution of the line terminator, as well as the control characters
listed above. For example using Alternate 2, the line terminator  (0x0D) is replaced by | (0x7C).
The following is a sample label format data stream for a printer configured for Alternate-2 Control Codes:
~L|1911A10001000101234560|X|~UT01ABCDE|~G|

8

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Immediate Command Functions

Introduction
When the printer receives an Immediate Command, its current operation will be momentarily interrupted
to respond to the command. Immediate Commands may be issued before or after System-Level
commands; however, they may not be issued among Label Formatting Commands or during font or
image downloading. Immediate Commands consist of:
1. Attention-Getter, 0x01 or 0x5E, see Control Codes.
2. Command Character

SOH #

Reset

This command resets the printer. Resetting the printer returns all settings to default and clears both
the communications and printing buffers. The command also clears DRAM memory.
Syntax:

#

Printer Response:

The printer will reset.
 T (The T may come before the )

SOH *

Reset

(Display-Equipped Models only)
This command forces a soft reset of the microprocessor, which resets the printer. Resetting the printer
returns all settings to default and clears the communications and print buffers.
Syntax:

*

Printer Response:

The printer will reset.
 T (The T may come before the )

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

9

Immediate Command Functions

SOH A

Send ASCII Status String

This command allows the host computer to check the current printer status. The printer returns a
string of eight characters, followed by a carriage return. Each character (see below) indicates an
associated condition, either true (Y) or false (N). Byte 1 is transmitted first. See F.
Syntax:

A

Sample:

A

Printer Response:

abcdefgh

Where:
Possible Values
a
Y/N
b
Y/N
c
Y/N
d
Y/N
e
Y/N
f
Y/N
g
Y/N
h
N

SOH B

Interpretation
= Interpreter busy (Imaging)
=
Paper out or fault
=
Ribbon out or fault
=
Printing batch
=
Busy printing
=
Printer paused
=
Label presented

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Always No
Table 3-1: ASCII Status Bytes

Byte Transmit Sequence
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Toggle Pause

This command toggles the printer’s paused state between on and off. (This is the same function
achieved by pressing the PAUSE Key on the printer.)
Syntax:

B

Sample:

B

Printer Response:

This command will illuminate the Paused/Stop Indicator and/or indicate
PAUSED on the LCD or graphics display panel, suspend printing, and wait
until one of the following occurs:
Ø The B command is sent to the printer.
Ø The PAUSE Key is pressed.
Upon which the printer will turn the Paused/Stop Indicator ‘Off’ and/or
remove PAUSED from the LCD or graphics display panel, then resume
operation from the point of interruption. (If the Receive Buffer is not full,
an  character will be transmitted from the printer.)

10

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Immediate Command Functions

SOH C

Stop/Cancel

This command performs the same function as pressing the STOP/CANCEL Key on the printer. This
function clears the current label format from the print buffer, pauses the printer, and illuminates the
Paused/Stop Indicator. (The pause condition is terminated as described under B.)
Syntax:

C

Sample:

C

Printer Response:

This command will clear the print buffer, pause the printer, illuminate the
Paused/Stop Indicator and/or indicate PAUSED on the LCD or graphics
display panel, suspend printing, and wait until one of the following occurs:
Ø
Ø

The B command is sent to the printer.
The PAUSE Key is pressed.

Upon which the printer will turn the Paused/Stop Indicator ‘Off’ and/or
remove PAUSED from the LCD or graphics display panel. (If the Receive
Buffer is not full, an  character will be transmitted from the printer.)

SOH D

SOH Shutdown

(Non-Display Models only)
This commands the printer to ignore Immediate Commands (^A). The SOH shutdown command is
required before loading images or fonts because some may contain data sequences that could be
interpreted as Immediate Commands. After the SOH shutdown command is sent, Immediate
Commands can be turned back on by sending a valid SOH command three times, separated by a one
second delay between each command, or by manually resetting the printer. It is good practice to
check batch quantities (E) to verify that the SOH commands are working.
Syntax:

D

Sample:

D

Printer Response:

This printer will ignore Immediate Commands (^A) until a valid SOH
command is received three times, separated by a one second delay between
each command; or, until the printer is manually reset.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

11

Immediate Command Functions

SOH E

Send Batch Quantity

This command causes the printer to send back a four-digit number indicating the quantity of labels
that remain to be printed in the current batch, followed by a carriage return. Communications latency
may cause this value to be higher than actual on some printers.
Syntax:

E

Printer response:

nnnn

Where:

nnnn

SOH F

- Is four decimal digits, 0-9999.

Send Status Byte

This command instructs the printer to send a single status byte where each bit (1 or 0) represents one
of the printer’s status flags, followed by a carriage return (see below). If an option is unavailable for
the printer, the single bit will always be 0. See A.
F

Syntax:

Printer response format: X
Where ‘X’ is 0 through 0xef with bits as indicated in the ‘Condition’ column below:
Bit[1]
Value
8
0
7
1 or 0
6
1 or 0
5
1 or 0
4
1 or 0
3
1 or 0
2
1 or 0
1
1 or 0
[1]
Bit one is the least significant bit.

SOH U

Condition
Always zero
Label presented
Printer paused
Busy printing
Printing batch
Ribbon out or Fault
Paper out or Fault
Command interpreter busy (Imaging)

Update System Database with Current Database

This command saves the current printer configuration to Flash memory. Only those parameters stored
in Flash memory are affected. These are all the parameters that can be modified via the Setup Menu.
The values of any  System Commands issued prior to U and affecting printer
configuration items will also be saved. See the # command, above, for details on what events
occur during a reset.

12

Syntax:

U

Printer response:

The printer will reset.
T (The T may come before the ).

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

System-Level Command Functions

Introduction
The most commonly used commands are the System-Level Commands. These are used to load and store
graphic information, in addition to printer control. System-Level Commands are used to override default
parameter values (fixed and selectable) and may be used before or after Immediate Commands but cannot
be issued among Label Formatting Commands. System-Level Commands consist of:
1. Attention-Getter, 0x02 or 0x7E, see Control Codes.

2. Command Character
3. Parameters (if any).

STX A

Set Time and Date

This command sets the time and date. The initial setting of the date will be stored in the printer’s
internal inch counter. This date can be verified by printing a Configuration Label.
AwmmddyyyyhhMMjjj

Syntax:
Where:
w
mm
dd
yyyy
hh
MM
jjj

1 digit for day of week; 1 = Monday; 7 = Sunday
2 digits for month
2 digits for day
4 digits for year
2 digits for hour in 24 hour format
2 digits for minutes
3 digits for Julian date (numerical day of the year) / constant; see notes below

Sample:

A1020319960855034

Printed response:

Mon. Feb 3, 1996, 8:55AM, 034

þ Notes: (1) When set to 000, the Julian date is automatically calculated; otherwise, the Julian date will print
as that entered number, without daily increments. If factory defaults are restored the actual Julian
date will also be restored.
(2) Printers without the Real Time Clock option lose the set time/date when power is removed.
(3) Response format is variable; see the Special Label Formatting Command T.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

13

System-Level Command Functions

STX a

Enable Feedback Characters

This command enables the feedback ASCII hex characters to be returned from the printer following
specific events after each completed batch of labels when using serial communications. The default
value is ‘Off’.
Syntax:

a

Printer response:

Event dependent. (Also, see Appendix D for error codes.)

Where:
Event
Invalid character
Label printed
End of batch

STX B

Return Characters
0x07 ( BEL )
0x1E ( RS )
0x1F ( US )

Get Printer Time and Date Information

This command instructs the printer to retrieve its internal time and date information.
Syntax:

B

Sample:

B

Printer response format: wmmddyyyyhhMMjjj
Where:
w
1 digit for day of week; 1 = Monday
mm
2 digits for month
dd
2 digits for day
yyyy
4 digits for year
hh
2 digits for hour in 24 hour format
MM
2 digits for minutes
jjj
3 digits for Julian date / constant*
* See A for details and restrictions.
Printer response sample: 1020319960855034

14

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

System-Level Command Functions

STX c

Set Continuous Paper Length

This command sets the label size for applications using continuous media. It disables the top-of-form
function performed by the Media Sensor. The sensor, however, continues to monitor paper-out
conditions. See M.
Syntax:

cnnnn

Where:

nnnn

Sample:

c0100

-

Specifies the length of the media feed for each label format, in
inches/100 or millimeters/10 (see m).

This sample sets a label length of 100, which equals 1.00 inch (assuming Imperial Mode is selected).
þ Note: This command must be reset to zero for edge or reflective sensing operation.

STX d

Set Double Buffer Mode

(Non-Display Models only)
This command, available for backward compatibility, enables double buffer mode. When printing
labels with incrementing, decrementing and replacement fields (see note below) the printer will only
erase and format those fields, leaving the rest of the label format untouched, and thus increasing
throughput. This command is only active if the labels being printed are less than half the maximum
size of the print buffer (see S).
Syntax:

d

þ Note: This command is generally not used because fast formatting is the normal operating mode when the
number of variable print fields (Label Formatting commands +, -, <, >, u) is less than or equal to 1/3
of the total print field count. In this case the command will force fast formatting even when the
proportion of variable print fields is greater than 1/3 the total. The maximum label size is unaffected
by this command. The s command restores normal (fast) formatting.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

15

System-Level Command Functions

STX E

Set Quantity For Stored Label

This command sets a number of labels for printing using the format currently in the print buffer. (The
printer automatically stores the most recent format received in the buffer until the printer is reset or
power is removed.) When used in conjunction with the G command, this will print the labels.
Syntax:

Ennnn

Where:

nnnn

Sample:

E0025
G

Printer response:

25 labels of the current format in memory will be printed.

- A four-digit quantity, including leading zeros.

þ Note: This command may be issued prior to a label format without a specified quantity, Qnnnnn. Also, if a
 terminates the command, a five-digit quantity (nnnnn) can be entered.

STX e

Select Edge Sensor

This command enables transmissive (see-through) sensing for top-of-form detection of die-cut, and
holed (or notched) media. This Media Sensor will detect a minimum gap of 0.1 inches (2.5 mm)
between labels (see the Operator’s Manual for media requirements). Use the O command to
adjust the print position. This is the printer default setting at power-up or reset.
e

Syntax:
þ Note:

STX F

This command is ignored when cnnnn is issued with a non-zero value for nnnn.

Form Feed

This commands the printer to form feed to the next start of print.
Syntax:

F

Printer response:

The printer will form feed.

þ Note:

16

Following a reset, if the length of the first label fed is less than the label offset value (defined by the
O command) the printer will advance past that label until a top-of-form is detected, or until the
offset is reached.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

System-Level Command Functions

STX f

Set Form Stop Position (Backfeed Command)

This sets the stop position of the printed label, allowing the label to stop at a point past the start-ofprint position. When the next label format is sent, the printer motor reverses direction to retract the
media to the start-of-print position. If quantities of more than one label are requested, the printer will
operate without backfeeding. A backfeed will then only occur when printing has stopped for a few
seconds.
Non-Display models: The printer must be set to ‘Host’ (via the menu) for this command to have
effect.
Display-equipped printers: SOP Emulation may be selected and enabled via the menu – if the SOP
Emulation is set to ‘Disabled’, this command is ignored.
Syntax:

fnnn

Where:

nnn

Sample:

f230

- Is a three-digit distance from the Media Sensor, in inches/100 or
mm/10. This distance is independent of the start-of-print position
(O), yet it must be greater than the start-of-print position to
take effect.

The sample sets a stop position distance of 230 (2.3 inches from the Media Sensor’s eye).

STX G

Print Last Label Format

This command prints a previously formatted label and restarts a canceled batch job following the last
processed label. This is used when there is a label format in the buffer. The E command is
used to enter the quantity. (If the E command is not used only one label will print.)
Syntax:

G

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

17

System-Level Command Functions

STX I

Input Image Data

This command must precede image downloading from a host computer to the printer. The data that
immediately follows the command string will be image data. If any of the 8-bit input formats are to
be used, it is necessary to disable the Immediate Command interpreter by executing an D
command before issuing the I command. See Appendix O for more information. To print an
image, see Generating Label Formats.
A-Class printers: A “ready mode” logo for the graphics display can input using this command. The
image must be stored on a Flash Module. The image name must be “LOGOLAB” in the following
DPL command. The available display area is 312 pixels wide by 94 pixels high. Images larger than
this specified width or height will be clipped on the right and/or bottom edges.
þ Note: The native format for storing downloaded PCX and BMP images is RLE-2. The result is a better
compression ratio and therefore the use of less module space for downloaded gray-scale images
and for images with very large areas of either black or white.

Syntax:

Iabfnn…ndata

Where:

a

- Memory Module Bank Select (see Appendix K).

b

- Data Type (optional), A or omit.
b Value:

A
omitted
f

Image Data Value Range:
ASCII Characters 0-9, A-F, (7 bit)
00-FF, (8 bit)

- Format Designator
f Designator:
Format Type:
F
7-bit Datamax image load file
B
.BMP 8-bit format (image flipped), black and

white (B&W)
b
I
i
P
p

Sample:

.BMP 8-bit format (image as received), B&W
.IMG 8-bit format (image flipped), B&W
.IMG 8-bit format (image as received), B&W
.PCX 8-bit format (image flipped), B&W
.PCX 8-bit format (image as received), B&W

nn…n

- Up to 16 characters used as an image name.



-

data

- Image data

0x0d terminates the name.

D
IDpTest 
data...data 

The sample instructs the printer to (1) receive an 8-bit PCX image sent by the host in an 8-bit data
format, (2) name the image ‘Test’, and (3) store it in memory module D.

18

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

System-Level Command Functions

STX i

Scalable Font Downloading

The command structure for downloading TrueType (.TTF) scalable fonts (font files may be singlebyte or double-byte character systems) is as follows :
Syntax:

imtnnNamexx…xdata…

Where:

m

- Memory Module Designator to save this font to; see Appendix K.

t

- Type of scalable font being downloaded:
T = TrueType

nn

- Two-digit font reference ID. Valid range is 50-99, 9A-9Z, 9a-9z,
(base 62 numbers).

Name

- The title, up to 16 characters, for this font.



- 0x0d terminates the Name.

xx…x

- Eight-digit size of the font data, number of bytes, hexadecimal,
padded with leading zeros.

data
Sample:

- The scalable font data.

iDT52Tree Frog000087C2data...

This sample downloads a TrueType font to module ‘D’ and assigns it the Font ID of 52 with the
name “Tree Frog”. The size of the font data is 0x87C2 bytes long.

STX J

Set Pause for Each Label

This command causes the printer to pause after printing each label. It is intended for use with the peel
mechanism or tear bar when the Present Sensor option is not installed. After removing the printed
label, the PAUSE Key must be pushed in order to print the next label. (The printer must be reset to
clear the J command.)
Syntax:

STX K

J

Extended-System Commands

This expands the System-Level Commands. See the Extended-System Commands for more
information.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

19

System-Level Command Functions

STX k

Test RS-232 Port

This command instructs the printer to transmit the Y character from the printer’s RS-232 port.
(Failure to receive Y could indicate an interfacing problem.)
Syntax:

k

Printer response:

Y

STX L

Enter Label Formatting Command Mode

This command switches the printer to the Label Formatting Command Mode. Once in this mode, the
printer expects to receive Record Structures and Label Formatting Commands. Immediate, SystemLevel, and Font Loading commands will be ignored until the label formatting mode is terminated
with E, s, or X, (see Label Formatting Commands for additional information).
Syntax:

STX M

L

Set Maximum Label Length

This command instructs the printer move media this distance in search of the top-of-form (label edge,
notch, black mark, etc.) before declaring a paper fault. A paper fault condition can occur if this setting
is too close (within 0.1 inch [2.54 mm]) to the physical length of the label. Therefore, it is a good
practice to set this command to 2.5 to 3 times the actual label length used. The minimum value should
be at least 5” (127 mm).
Syntax:

Mnnnn

Where:

nnnn

Sample:

M0500

- Is a four-digit length, 0000-9999, in/100 or mm/10. Maximum
setting is 9999 (99.99 inches or 2540 mm). The default setting is
16 inches/ 406.4 mm

The sample sets a maximum travel distance of 5 inches (unless the printer is in metric mode, see
m).

STX m

Set Printer To Metric Mode

This command sets the printer to interpret measurements as metric values (e.g., c0100 will
equal 10.0 mm). The default is Imperial (see n).
Syntax:

20

m

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

System-Level Command Functions

STX n

Set Printer to Imperial Mode

This command sets the printer to interpret measurements as inch values (e.g., c0100 will
equal 1.00 inch). The printer defaults to this mode.
n

Syntax:

STX O

Set Start of Print (SOP) Position

This command sets the point to begin printing relative to the top-of-form (the label’s edge as detected
by the Media Sensor). The printer will feed from the top-of-form to the value specified in this
command to begin printing.
This value operates independently of the f command.
Non-Display models: The printer must be set to ‘Host’ (via the menu) for this command to have
effect.
Display-equipped models: If SOP Emulation is set to ‘Enabled’ (via the menu) – this command sets
the point where printing starts, emulating the selected legacy printer’s distance, as measured between
the media sensor and the printhead burn line. In addition, regardless of the SOP Emulation setting the
start of print position can be fine-tuned via the menu: Menu Mode / Print Control / Custom
Adjustments / Row Adjust.
Syntax:

Onnnn

Where:

nnnn

-

Is a four-digit offset value in inches/100 or mm/10. The
“zero” setting is the default value, and settings below 50 are
adjusted back to the default value.
Non-display models: the default setting is 0220 in Imperial
Mode (0559 in Metric Mode).
Display-equipped models: the default setting is ‘Off’ and
the printer assumes the natural start of print position.

Sample (non-display
models):

O0300

The above sample sets a start of print position of 3.0 inches (unless in Metric Mode, see m).
Sample (displayequipped models):

O0210

The above sample will begin printing 0.1 inch closer to the leading edge of the label if the 220
(Allegro) SOP Emulation was selected, or 1.0 inch farther away from the leading edge if 110
(ProdPlus) SOP Emulation was selected.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

21

System-Level Command Functions

STX o

Cycle Cutter

This command will cause the optional cutter mechanism to immediately perform a cut after all
previously received commands are executed. The cutter must be installed, enabled and the
interlock(s) closed for operation.
Syntax:

STX P

o

Set Printer to Character (HEX) Dump Mode

This command instructs the printer to assume Character Hex Dump Mode (also known as ASCII
dump or monitor mode). Data sent to the printer following this command will be printed in raw
ASCII format. To capture this data, labels must be at least four inches (102 mm) long and as wide as
the maximum print width. This command has the same effect as turning the printer ‘On’ while
pressing the FEED Key; however, no Configuration/Test Pattern label will be printed. To return to
normal operation the printer must be manually reset.
Syntax:

STX p

P

Controlled Pause

The controlled pause command will cause the printer to pause only after all previously received
commands are executed. This is often useful between label batches. (This command will not clear the
pause condition, see B).
Syntax:

STX Q

p

Clear All Modules

This command instructs the printer to clear all of the Flash and DRAM modules (see the Operator’s
Manual of the corresponding printer for applicable module options). All stored data will be
destroyed.
Syntax:

22

Q

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

System-Level Command Functions

STX q

Clear Module

This command clears the selected Flash or DRAM module. If a module is corrupted during normal
operations (identifiable when the printer responds with a ‘No Modules Available’ message to a
W command), it must be cleared. All stored data will be destroyed.
Syntax:

qa

Where:

a

Sample:

qA

-

Memory module designator, see Appendix K.

The sample clears memory module A.
þ Notes:

(1) If a module directory intermittently returns the message ‘No Modules Available’ or if data
continuously becomes corrupt with the write protect switch on, the module may be at the end of its
service. However, before concluding that a module is defective, cycle the printer’s power and test
the module.
(2) E-Class models: Some Flash Memory Expansion options must have Write Enable jumpers
installed to perform this command.

STX R

Ribbon Saver On/Off

(Display-Equipped Models only)
This command enables the operation of the optional Ribbon Saver. It is the only command used to
control the Ribbon Saver. Its operation is continuous when enabled. The printer must be set to
thermal transfer (ribbon) printing mode then, during operation, the Ribbon Saver engages
automatically, lifting when the minimum amount of label white space is exceeded.
Syntax:

Rx

Where:

x

Sample:

RY

-

Y - Enabled (Default = Menu selection.)
N - Disabled

The sample will turn the ribbon saver on.
þ Note: This command is ignored on units not equipped with the ribbon saver option.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

23

System-Level Command Functions

STX r

Select Reflective Sensor

This command enables reflective (black mark) sensing for top-of-form detection of rolled butt-cut,
and fan-fold or tag stocks with reflective marks on the underside. This Media Sensor will detect a
minimum mark of 0.1 inches (2.54 mm) between labels (see the Operator’s Manual for media
requirements). The end of the black mark determines the top of form. Use the O command to
adjust the print position.
Syntax:

r

Default setting:

Edge sensing

STX S

Set Feed Rate

This command controls the output rate of the media when the FEED Key is pressed.
Syntax:

Sn

Where:

n

STX s

-

Is a letter value (see Appendix L).

Set Single Buffer Mode

(Non-Display Models only)
This command, available for backward compatibility, instructs the printer to use single buffer
operation. In single buffer mode, the printer will erase and format all fields. This, in turn, decreases
printer throughput when incremental, decremental, or replacement fields are used (see Label
Formatting Commands). See d.
Syntax:

24

s

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

System-Level Command Functions

STX T

Print Dot Pattern Test Label

This command instructs the printer to produce a Dot Pattern Label, a label comprised of different
patterns that exercise the printhead. This is the same test label printed when powering on the printer
while pressing the FEED Key, except that the printer will not produce a Configuration Label or enter
the Hex Dump Mode. (On display-equipped models, it can also be generated as a Quick Test Label.)
To view the full dot pattern use media at least 2 inches (51 mm) long and as wide as the maximum
print width.
T

Syntax:
Printer response (dots
patterns may vary):

STX t

Test DRAM Memory Module

This command tests the DRAM module. The printer returns a one-line message stating the module
condition (no message is returned if a module is unavailable).
Syntax:

t
results

- Test results given as ‘Good’ or ‘Bad’.

Non-display models: The printer must be in Test Mode for the command to function. To enable the
Test Mode see the KD command.
Printer response format: axxxK results
Where:

a

- 2 = Slot B

xxx

- Module size in Kbytes

Display-equipped models: The printer must have Feedback Characters enabled for this command to
function. Feedback Characters can be enabled via the menu (see the Operator’s Manual for additional
information).
Printer response format: Module A: xxxxK
Module B: xxxxK
Module D: xxxxK
Where:

xxxx

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

DRAM Tested results
DRAM Tested results
DRAM Tested results

- Module size in Kbytes.

25

System-Level Command Functions

STX U

Label Format String Replacement Field

This command places new label data into format fields to build a label. Two options are available:
Exact Length and Truncated Length.
To easily keep track of fields, place all of the fields to be updated with the command at the beginning
of the label format. A maximum of 99 format fields can be updated. Fields are numbered
consecutively 01 to 99 in the order received.
Exact Length Replacement Field Functions – The new data string must equal the original string
length and contain valid data. When the dynamic data is shorter than the length of the originally
defined data field, then field will be padded with blanks (or zero when the Format Record header
specifies a numeric bar code).
Syntax:

Unnss…s

Where:

nn

- Is the format field number, 2 digits.

ss…s

- Is the new string data, followed by a 

Exact Length Sample: L
1A1100001000100DATA FIELD 1
161100001100110data field 2
161100001200120data field 3
Q0001
E
U01123
U02New data F2
E0002
G
The sample produces three labels. The first is formatted with the commands between L and E.
The next two labels print with the replacement data contained in the U commands (see
E and G). The barcode is the same length: 3 digits and nine spaces.

Truncated Length Replacement Field Functions – A variant of the U command includes the
truncate option ‘T’, where dynamic data shorter than the originally defined field length will not be
padded, and the original maximum field length is maintained for subsequent replacements.

26

Syntax:

UTnnss…s

Where:

nn

- Is the format field number, 2 digits.

T

- Truncate option

ss…s

- Is the new string data, followed by a 

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

System-Level Command Functions

Truncated Sample:

L
1A1100001000100data field 1
161100001100110data field 2
161100001200120data field 3
Q0001
E
UT01123
U02New data F2
E0002
G

The sample produces three labels. The first is formatted with the commands between L and E.
The next two labels print with the replacement data contained in the U commands (see
E and G). The barcode is shortened; it only has three digits (and no spaces).

STX V

Software Switch Settings

This command controls the printer options, where the appropriate value allows the option(s) to be
‘On’ or ‘Off.’ Each option has a corresponding bit whose value is ‘1’ when enabled. The tables below
indicate the bit assignments and corresponding command value needed to enable the desired
option(s).
Display-equipped models: printer options are set by entering selections through the menu. The
software setting command allows two of these option settings to be modified without returning to the
menu.
Syntax:

Vn

Where:

n

Sample:

V5

-

Is a single digit ASCII numeric value from 0-F. The value of
n is used to override the power-up option settings. Reset or
power-up returns the printer to the original settings.

The sample corresponds to setting Bits 0 and 2, creating a command value of 5. When applied, this
enables the Present Sensor and Cutter options.
Bit Assignment
0
1
2
3

Printer Option
Cutter
N/A
Present Sensor
N/A
Table 4-1: Software Switch Bit Assignment

Use the bit assignment table above to determine the command value n in the binary table below (e.g.,
the command value 5 sets the bits 0 and 2 to ‘1’).

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

27

System-Level Command Functions

n Value
0
1
4
5

STX v

Command Values for Bits Assigned
Bit
3
2
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
Table 4-2: Software Switch Binary

1
0
0
0
0

0
0
1
0
1

Request Firmware Version

This command causes the printer to send its version string (this data is the same as that printed on the
configuration label). The version may be different from printer to printer.

28

Syntax:

v

Printer Response:

VER: 4308 – 06.06 07/09/2001



Class Series Programmer’s Manual

System-Level Command Functions

STX W

Request Memory Module Information

This command requests a directory listing for memory module(s). Although a module can store font,
graphics and format data together, it can display only one type of information at a time. If the module
contains all three types of data, it will be necessary to check the directory three times, using each of
the control parameters, F, G, and L, to determine the contents. When no user accessible modules are
present, there is no printer response to WF, WG, or WL.
Syntax:

Wa

Where:

a

- Data type:
F
G
L
f

=
=
=
=

Downloaded Font
Graphic (Image)
Label
All fonts (respective of the resident fonts available and any
fonts that have been downloaded).

Wf

Sample:
Printer response (using
an E-Class printer):

Meaning:
MODULE: A
Module ID ‘A’, fonts following reside in this module
103 CG Triumv  Downloaded font ID and name
MODULE: F
Module ID ‘F’ (no user access), fonts following reside in this
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020




















Class Series Programmer’s Manual

module
Font internal ID 000, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 0
Font internal ID 001, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 1
Font internal ID 002, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 2
Font internal ID 003, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 3
Font internal ID 004, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 4
Font internal ID 005, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 5
Font internal ID 006, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 6
Font internal ID 007, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 7
Font internal ID 008, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 8
Font internal ID 012, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 9, A06
Font internal ID 013, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 9, A08
Font internal ID 014, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 9, A16
Font internal ID 015, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 9, A12
Font internal ID 016, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 9, A14
Font internal ID 017, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 9, A18
Font internal ID 018, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 9, A24
Font internal ID 019, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 9, A30
Font internal ID 020, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 9, A36

29

System-Level Command Functions

STX w

Test Flash Memory Module

This command tests the Flash memory module. The time for each test will vary from 20 to 120
seconds, depending upon the size of the module. All stored data will be destroyed. If no module is
present, there will be no printer response.
Syntax:

wa

Where:

a

- Module designator; see Appendix K.

Printer response format: Module A: xxxxK results
Where:

A

- Module tested.

xxxx

- Module size in kilobytes.

results - Test results given as ‘Good’ or ‘Bad’.
þ Note:

STX X

E-Class models: Some Flash Memory Expansion options must have Write Enable jumpers installed
to perform this command.

Set Default Module

This command, typically used prior to the loading of PCL-4 bit-mapped fonts (see Font Loading
Commands), is designed to allow the user to select between modules when downloading information.
The default module is one of the following:
1. The first alpha designator of the existing modules if item 2 has not occurred.
2. The module selected by this command.
Syntax:

Xa

Where:

a

Sample:

XB

-

Module designator; See Appendix K.

The sample sets ‘B’ as the default module.

30

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

System-Level Command Functions

STX x

Delete File from Module

This command removes a specific file from the specified module. The file name is removed from the
module directory and thus the file cannot be accessed. The actual storage space occupied by the file is
not released. To reclaim deleted file storage space use z.
Syntax:

xmtnn…n

Where:

m

- Module designator; see Appendix K.

t

- The file type identification code:
G
L
F
S

nn…n

STX Y

=
=
=
=

Image file
Label format file
Bit-Mapped font file
Smooth scalable font file

- The file name to delete, up to sixteen alphanumeric characters for
graphic or label format files, 3 for bit-mapped font files, and 2 for
smooth scalable font files.

Output Sensor Values

This command causes the printer to respond with the sensor value status. When Y is received,
the printer will respond with the digitally converted values of its internal analog sensors (see below).
To repeat the display of values, send the printer a ‘SPACE’ (20 hexadecimal). Send  to
terminate this function.
Non-display models: The printer must be in Test Mode for the command to function. To enable the
Test Mode see the KD command.
Display-equipped models: The printer must have Feedback Characters enabled for this command to
function. Feedback Characters can be enabled via the menu (see the Operator’s Manual for additional
information).
Syntax:

Y

Printer response:

Thermistor ADC: 0048 Reflective ADC: 0000
Transmissive ADC: 0204 Paperout ADC: 0000 24 Volt ADC:
0217 Contrast ADC: 0093 TOF Adjust ADC: 0170 Ribbon
ADC: 0125 Battery Level: Good


Where:

Paperout ADC:

0225 indicates paper is present;
0000 indicates paper is not present.

Battery level: Good indicates the battery has sufficient charge;
Low indicates the battery is insufficiently charged.
þ Notes:

Equipped sensors vary with printer, model, and options. In addition, some readings require printercontrolled paper movement to indicate a meaningful value.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

31

System-Level Command Functions

STX y

Select Font Symbol Set

This command selects the scalable font symbol set. The selected symbol set remains active until
another symbol set is selected. See the KS command and Appendices E, I, and H for more
information. Option dependant. Not all symbol sets can be used with all fonts.
Syntax:

ySxx

Where:

S

-

Byte-size designation; see Appendix H:
S = Single byte symbol sets.
U = Double byte symbol sets.

xx

-

Symbol set selection.

ySPM

Sample:

The sample selects the PC-850 multilingual set.

STX Z

Print Configuration and Dot Pattern Labels

This command prints Configuration and Dot Pattern Labels. The results are similar to performing the
power-up self-test, but the printer does not enter Hex Dump Mode. To capture all printed information,
use the labels as wide as the maximum print width and at least 4 inches (102 mm) long.
Z

Syntax:
Printer response:

FRI SEPTEMBER 026, 1997 19:29 244
VER: E4304 - 04.06 08/24/01
BOOT 83-2329-04A
CODE 83-2325-04F
FONT 83-2337-01A
CPLD 59-2157-01C
SYSTEM RAM CHECKS____ GOOD
SYSTEM RAM SIZE___ 2016 KBYTES
SYSTEM RAM AVAIL__ 1264 KBYTES
REG POWER SUPPLY__ NO

DIRECT THERMAL
COMMUNICATIONS NOT DETECTED
9600,8,N
EDGE
SOP ADJUST________ 128
PRESENT ADJUST____ 128
TOF LOW___________
0
TOF DELTA_________ 10
TOF GAIN__________ 10
OOS MAXVOLT_______
2

INPUT VALUES
PAPER_____________
DARKNESS__________
TRAN______________
REFL______________
RIBM______________
THR_______________
24V_______________

COUNTER INFORMATION
ABSOLUTE VALUES 9-18-1999
LENGTH____
773 INCHES
TIME______
20 HOURS
RESETTABLE VALUES 9-22-1999
LENGTH____
576 INCHES
TIME______
10 HOURS

255
131
255
149
87
48
223

MEMORY CONFIGURATION
INTERNAL MODULE______ 128
SCALABLE FONTS_______
64
LABEL SIZE
0410:02218 IN

þ Notes:

STX z

Printed information will vary according to printer, model, firmware version, and options.

Pack Module

This command causes the printer to reclaim all storage space associated with all deleted files on the
specified module (see X and x).

32

Syntax:

zm

Where:

m

-

The module identification character, see Appendix K.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Extended System-Level Command Functions

Introduction
Extended System-Level Commands expand certain System-Level Commands, providing extra printer
control. Extended-System Commands are issued in the same context as System-Level Commands.

STX K

Memory Configuration (Non-Display Models only)

This command configures the available DRAM (including any installed optional DRAM) as a method
for managing printer memory. Memory can be assigned to specific entities or functions in units of
4KB blocks. The allocation(s) set by this command, draw from the same memory pool, affecting
maximum print length and label throughput (see note below). The printer executes the memory
configuration specified by the command during the next idle period following its receipt, and is stored
in Flash memory then reinstated upon a power-up or reset. If the total requested memory allocation
exceeds the configurable memory available, contains no fields, or for configurations not specified, the
command will be rejected and the printer will assume its previous configuration. Any of the three
fields are optional, and are separated by the colon. Brackets indicate optional fields.
Syntax:

Kix[:jy][:kz]

Sample:

KM0020:S0015

In the sample, memory is allocated 20*4*1024 bytes for module space and 15*4*1024 bytes for the
scalable cache.
Where: i, j, k are M, S, or W; x, y, z are four-digit maximum numbers of 4K byte blocks or
inches/100 or (mm/10) as described below.
M

Represents the start of a sequence (up to five characters) that assigns memory to the Internal
Module. If this field does not appear, then the Internal Module is not affected. If no Internal
Module exists, it will be created and formatted. Existing Internal Modules will be erased, resized and formatted. The number that follows the M is a decimal number (up to four digits) that
specifies the size in 4KB blocks of memory to assign to the Internal Module. A value of “0000”
will delete the Internal Module (see Appendix J for additional information).

S

Represents the start of a sequence (up to five characters) that assigns the amount of internal
memory allocated to the smooth scalable font processor. This field is optional; if it does not
appear, the current amount of memory assigned to the smooth scalable font processor will
remain unchanged. The allocation must be at least 15 (60KB) to print scalable fonts, and at least
30 for double-byte fonts. The number that follows the S is a decimal number (up to four digits)
that specifies the size in 4 KB blocks to assign to the smooth scalable font processor. Any value

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

33

Extended System-Level Command Functions

less than the minimum requirement results in the amount assigned to be zero (0), thereby
disabling the printing of smooth scalable fonts. The recommended value is 0025 (100KB).
W

Represents the start of a sequence (up to five characters) that sets the printable label width.
Setting a width smaller than the natural (maximum) width of the printer effectively extends
printable label length. This field is optional; if it does not appear, the current printable label
width is left unchanged. The number that follows the W is a decimal number (up to four digits)
that specifies the printable label width in either 100ths of an inch or in millimeters, depending on
the current units setting of the printer (imperial or metric). If the value specified exceeds the
printable width of the printer, the printable label width is set to the maximum. If the value
specified is less than the minimum value allowed (200) then the printable label width is set to the
minimum allowed value.

þ Note: Label printing requirements may be computed as bytes (label print length * width allocation * printhead
resolution / 8). For maximum throughput, the memory allocated should allow for a minimum of three
times the computed requirement, or the available label length (as determined by KQ command)
should be three times the label print length.

STX Kb

Backfeed Time Delay

(Non-Display Models only)
The backfeed time delay command controls the time a printed label is allowed to remain “presented”
before being retracted to the start of print position.

34

Syntax:

Kbnnn

Where:

nnn

- Seconds/10

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Extended System-Level Command Functions

STX KC

Get Configuration

This command returns the configuration of the printer. The form of the returned data is similar to that
of a printed Configuration Label. This command should be parsed by KEYWORDS, not by
Character POSITIONS. Each line is terminated by a CR (0x0d) & LF (0x0a). Datamax will
make every effort to keep Keyword consistent.
Syntax:

KC

Printer response:
CONFIGURATION
TUE 02:01PM
01AUG2001
PRINTER KEY:
4308-TB10-010327494
APPLICATION
VERSION:
83-2284-06E
06.06 07/09/2001
BOOT LOADER:
83-2269-03D 03.04
10/30/2000
SYSTEM INFORMATION
PRINT BUFFER SIZE:
280 in.
FLASH SIZE:
4 MB
RAM TEST:
PASS
OPTIONAL
LANGUAGES:
FRANCAIS
ITALIANO
DEUTSCH
ESPAÑOL
CONFIGURATION
FILE:
NONE
MEDIA SETTINGS
MEDIA TYPE
THERMAL TRANSFER
SENSOR TYPE
GAP
LABEL LENGTH
04.00 in.
MAXIMUM LABEL
LENGTH
•30.00 in.
PAPER OUT DISTANCE
00.25 in.
LABEL WIDTH
4.16 in.
SENSOR CALIBRATION
PAPER SENSOR LEVEL
144
GAP SENSOR LEVEL
30
EMPTY SENSOR LEVEL
0

SENSOR GAIN
10
PRINT CONTROL
HEAT
10
PRINT SPEED
6.0in/sec
FEED SPEED
6.0in/sec
REVERSE SPEED
4.0in/sec
ROW OFFSET
00.00 in.
COLUMN OFFSET
00.00 in.
PRESENT DISTANCE
0.00 in.
CUSTOM
ADJUSTMENTS:
DARKNESS
32
ROW ADJUST
64 DOTS
COLUMN ADJUST
0 DOTS
PRESENT ADJUST
64 DOTS
PRINTER OPTIONS
MODULES
A: NOT INSTALLED
B: NOT INSTALLED
D: FORMATTED
F: NOT INSTALLED
G: FORMATTED
X: FORMATTED
Y: 83-2296-01C
Z: NOT INSTALLED
PRESENT SENSOR
NOT INSTALLED
CUTTER
NOT INSTALLED
GPIO PORT:
NOT INSTALLED
SYSTEM SETTINGS
FACTORY SETTING
FILE
NONE
INTERNAL MODULE
1024 KB
DEFAULT MODULE

D
SCALEABLE FONT
CACHE
312 KB
SINGLE BYTE
SYMBOLS
PC-850
MULTILINGUAL
DOUBLE BYTE
SYMBOLS
UNICODE
ABSOLUTE COUNTER
3782 in.
27MAR2001
RESETTABLE COUNTER
205 in.
27MAR2001
FORMAT ATTRIBUTES
XOR
IMAGING MODE
MULTIPLE LABEL
PAUSE MODE
DISABLED
SELECT SECURITY
DISABLED
PEEL MODE
DISABLED
UNITS OF MEASURE
IMPERIAL
SOP EMULATION
DISABLED
BACK AFTER PRINT
DISABLED
MENU LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
COMMUNICATIONS
SERIAL PORT A:
BAUD RATE
9600 BPS
PROTOCOL
BOTH
PARITY
NONE
DATA BITS
8
STOP BITS
1
SERIAL PORT B:
NOT INSTALLED
PARALLEL PORT A:

PORT DIRECTION
UNI-DIRECTIONAL
PORT STATUS
DISABLED
PARALLEL PORT B:
PORT DIRECTION
BI-DIRECTIONAL
PORT STATUS
DISABLED
NIC ADAPTER:
DMXNET INACTIVE
HOST SETTINGS:
HOST TIMEOUT
10 SEC
CONTROL CODES
STANDARD CODES
FEEDBACK
CHARACTERS
DISABLED
ESC SEQUENCES
ENABLED
HEAT COMMAND
ENABLED
SPEED COMMANDS
ENABLED
DIAGNOSTICS
HEX DUMP MODE
DISABLED
PRINT TEST
RATE(min)
0
SENSOR READINGS
THR TRAN RIBM 24V
132 141 159 178
PS HD RANK
000 254 000
RIBBON SENSOR
LIMITS
RIBBON ADC LOW
105
RIBBON ADC HIGH
182
END OF LIST

þ Note: Displayed information and its formatted form will vary with printer, model, firmware version, and equipped
options.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

35

Extended System-Level Command Functions

STX Kc

Configuration Set

This command specifies the Power-up Configuration parameter values for the printer and is
equivalent to using other system commands followed by the U. This command is intended
for easily configuring a custom setup, but NOT for dynamic configuration changes.
Configuration commands are examined for differences relative to the current configuration; the
command has no impact when there are no differences. Display-equipped printers will reset upon
completion of a command stream containing parameter value changes; non-display models perform
this reset only for certain functions, such as memory allocation. In any case, no commands should be
sent to the printer until this reset is complete. The following are highlights of this command:
•

These parameter values are equivalent to changing the respective menu settings and do not affect
the factory default settings of the printer.

•

If separated by a semi-colon (;), multiple parameter values may be sent in a single command
stream; see sample below.

•

All values are stored in Flash memory and remain in effect until new values are received or until
factory defaults are restored.

•

If system commands are sent that override the Power-up Configuration value(s), the Power-up
Configuration value(s) will be restored the next time the printer is powered ‘On’ or reset.

•

These parameters are the same as those found in the Setup Menu (non-display models), or as
those found in the Menu System (display-equipped models). The respective functions are
documented in the appropriate Operator’s or Maintenance Manual. Not all commands are
effective on all Class printers.
þ Note: Illegal or out of range parameter values may have unpredictable results. In addition, Media
sensing scaling values, TOF Bias, etc. may not be effective on other printers of the same type
due to hardware tolerances.

Syntax:

Kcaa1val1[;aaIvalI][;aanvaln]

Where:

aa1, aaI, aan

- Are two letter parameter names.

val1, valI, valn

- Are parameter values, with ranges appropriate for
the associated parameter.

Sample:

KcPA120;CL600;STC

The sample sets the Present Adjust to 120 dots, the Continuous Label Length to 6 inches, and the
Sensor Type to Continuous.
The following table summarizes the different Set Configuration Command parameters. Descriptions
of these parameters can be found by referencing the Command Equivalent column of the table. Where
no equivalent is given, unique parameter descriptions follow the tables.

36

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Extended System-Level Command Functions

Configuration Set Commands
Units /
Applicable
Interpretation
Printer Type
1/100 in.
Non-Display

Kc
Parameter Name
Alignment Length

Parameter
Pneumonic
AL

Value /
Range
0 – 999

Single Byte Symbol Set

AS

Backup After Print

BA

2 Byte alpha
character
Y, N

AA – ZZ, printer
resident symbol set
Enabled, Disabled

Backup Label

BL

0, 3, 4

British Pound

BP
BS or bS

Backup (Reverse) Speed

Equivalent Menu Item
or Menu Item Number
19

Command
Equivalent
N/A

Display-Equipped
Non-Display
Display-Equipped

System Settings
N/A
System Settings

y, ySxx

I-Class GPIO-1
equipped printers
Display-Equipped

Printer Options

N/A

Y, N

0 = Disabled, 3 = Active
Low, 4 = Active High
Enabled, Disabled

N/A

N/A

Model specific ranges;
see Appendix L.
Enabled, Disabled

Display-Equipped

Print Control

pa

System Settings

N/A

Dots, model specific; see
Appendix K.
Standard, Alternate,
Alternate-2,
Standard, Alternate,
Alternate-2
Enabled, Disabled

Graphics DisplayEquipped
Display-Equipped

Print Control

N/A

Display-Equipped

Communications

N/A

Non-Display

9

KD

Display-Equipped
Non-Display
Display-Equipped
Non-Display
Display-Equipped
Non-Display
Display-Equipped

Printer Options
4
Communications
N/A
Media Settings
10
Print Control

V

Display-Equipped
Non-Display

Communications
N/A

N/A

Buzzer Enable

BZ

alpha
character
Y, N

Column Adjust

CA

0 – 128

Control Codes

CC

S, 1, 2
S, 1, 2

Cutter Equipped

CE

Comm Heat Commands

CH

Continuous Label Length

CL

A/Y, E, N/D
A, Y, N
Y, N
1, 0
0 – 9999

Column Offset

CO

0 – 9999

1/100 in.

Comm Speed Commands

CS

Y, N
1, 0

Enabled, Disabled

Enabled, Disabled
1/100 in.

N/A

N/A
c
Cnnnn

Table 5-1: Configuration Set Commands

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

37

Extended System-Level Command Functions

Kc
Parameter Name
Comm TOF Commands

Configuration Set Commands
Units /
Applicable
Interpretation
Printer Type
Enabled, Disabled
Display-Equipped

Parameter
Pneumonic
CT

Value /
Range
Y, N

Equivalent Menu Item
or Menu Item Number
Communications

Command
Equivalent
N/A

DPI Emulation

DE

Dots per inch

Darkness

DK

200, 300,
400, 600
1 – 64

Display-Equipped

System Settings

N/A

N/A

Display-Equipped

Print Control

N/A

Default Module

DM

D, G

Module Letter

Display-Equipped

System Settings

X

Delay Rate (Quick Tests)

DR

0 – 120

Seconds

Display-Equipped

Diagnostics

N/A

Double Byte Symbol Set

DS

System Settings

y, ySxx

EM
EN

Display-Equipped
Non-Display
Display-Equipped

System Settings
21
N/A

N/A

End Character

AA – ZZ, printer
resident symbol set
DPL, Line
DPL, Line, ESC/Pause
N/A

Display-Equipped

Input Mode

2 Byte alpha
character
0, 1
0, 1, 2
D

End Of Print

EP

1, 2, 3, 4

Display-equipped

Printer Options
(GPIO option)

N/A

Start of Print

EQ

3, 4

Display-Equipped

Printer Options

N/A

ESC Sequences

ES

Y, N

1=Low Pulse, 2=High
Pulse,
3=Active Low, 4=Active
High
3 = Active Low,
4 = Active High
Enabled, Disabled

Display-Equipped

Communications

N/A

Exact Time

ET

Y, N

Enabled, Disabled

Non-Display

24

N/A

Empty Sensor Level

EV

0 – 255

N/A

Display-Equipped

Media Settings

N/A

Format Attributes

FA

X, O, T

XOR, Opaque,
Transparent

Display-Equipped

System Settings

An

N/A

Table 5-1: Configuration Set Commands (continued)

38

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Extended System-Level Command Functions

Kc
Parameter Name
Font Emulation

Configuration Set Commands
Units /
Applicable
Interpretation
Printer Type
0 = No Substitution
Display
1 = Sub CG Times SA0
Non-Display
2 = Sub User S50
See Table 5-2.
Display-Equipped

Parameter
Pneumonic
FE

Value /
Range
0, 1, 2

Equivalent Menu Item
or Menu Item Number
N/A

Command
Equivalent
N/A

Fault Handling

FH

L, D, R

System Settings

N/A

Feedback Mode

FM

Y, N

Enabled, Disabled

Display-Equipped

Communications

a

GPIO Enable

GE

A, V, N

Display-Equipped
Non-Display
Display-Equipped

Printer Options
25
Media Settings

N/A

0 – 255

Applicator, Verifier,
Disabled
N/A

Gap / Mark Value

GM

Gain Reflective Value

GR

0 – 255

N/A

Display-Equipped

Media Settings

N/A

Head Bias

HB

L, R

N/A

A-Class only

System Settings

N/A

Head Cleaning

HC

0 – 9999

Display-Equipped

Media Settings

N/A

Heat

HE

0 – 30

Inches (or centimeters)
multiplied by 1000
N/A

Display-Equipped

Print Control

Hnn

Host Timeout

HT

1 – 60

Seconds

Display-Equipped

Communications

N/A

Ignore Control Codes

IC

Enabled, Disabled

IE

Display-Equipped
Non-Display
Non-Display

Communications
N/A
N/A

N/A

Ignore Distances

Y, N
1, 0
1, 0

Imaging Mode

IL

M, S

Display-Equipped

System Settings

N/A

Internal Module

IM

100 – max
available, see
Appendix K
0 – 128
Y, N, A

Display-Equipped

System Settings

N/A

Non-Display
Non-Display

17
18

KM
N/A

Label Alignment

LA

Enabled, Disabled
Multiple Label,
Single Label
Kbytes

4 Kbytes (0 = disabled)
Enabled, Disabled,
Automatic
See Table 5-3.

N/A

N/A

Table 5-1: Configuration Set Commands (continued)

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

39

Extended System-Level Command Functions

Kc
Parameter Name
Legacy Emulation

Configuration Set Commands
Units /
Applicable
Interpretation
Printer Type
N=None, A=Allegro,
Display-Equipped
P=Prodigy,
Non-Display
L=Prodigy Plus,
M=Prodigy Max
Language Name
Display-Equipped

Parameter
Pneumonic
LE

Value /
Range
N, A, P, L, M
N, A, P, L

Equivalent Menu Item
or Menu Item Number
System Settings
22

Command
Equivalent
N/A
N/A

Language Select

LS

String

System Settings

N/A

Label Width

LW

1/100 inch

Module Commands

MC

75 – head
width, see
Appendix K
CZ

Display-Equipped
Non-Display

Media Settings
15

N/A
KW

1-7 Flash Size / MB

Display-Equipped

N/A

N/A

Maximum Label Length

ML

0 – 9999

1/100 inch

Display-Equipped

Media Settings

M

Media Type

MT

D, T

Direct, Thermal Transfer

Mark Value

MV

0 – 255

N/A

Display-Equipped
Non-Display
Display-Equipped

Media Settings
1
Media Settings

N/A
KD
N/A

Disable Symbol Set
Selection

NS

Y, N

Enabled, Disabled

Non-Display

N/A

N/A

Present Adjust

PA

0 – 128

PC

0 – 64

Present Distance

PD

0 – 400

1/100 inch

Display-Equipped
Non-Display
Display-Equipped
Non-Display
Display-Equipped

Print Control
6
Print Control
N/A
Print Control

N/A

Print Contrast

Dots, model specific; see
Appendix K.
N/A

Kf

Peel Mode

PE

Y, N

Enabled, Disabled

Display-Equipped

System Settings

N/A

Printer Level

PL

Hex Codes

Display-Equipped

System Settings

N/A

Pause Mode

PM

000000 –
FFFFFF
Y, N

Enabled, Disabled

Display-Equipped

System Settings

J

Paper Out Distance

PO

0 – 9999

1/100 inch

Display-Equipped

Media Settings

N/A

N/A

Table 5-1: Configuration Set Commands (continued)

40

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Extended System-Level Command Functions

Configuration Set Commands
Units /
Applicable
Interpretation
Printer Type
See Table 5-4.
Display-Equipped

Kc
Parameter Name
Parallel Direction

Parameter
Pneumonic
PP

Value /
Range
xDz

Present Sensor Enable

PS

A/Y, E, N/D
A, Y, N

Enabled, Disabled

Print Speed

pS

Tear Position

PT

Alpha
character
Y, N

Paper Value

PV

Password

Equivalent Menu Item
or Menu Item Number
Communications

Command
Equivalent
N/A

Display-Equipped
Non-Display

Printer Options
3

Model specific ranges;
see Appendix L.
Enabled, Disabled

Display-Equipped

Print Control

V
V,
KD
P

Non-Display

20

N/A

0 – 255

N/A

Display-Equipped

Media Settings

N/A

PW

A – Z, 0 – 9

Display-Equipped

System Settings

N/A

Query Configuration

QQ

Q

Four characters.
If security is ‘On,’
8 characters
N/A

All

Configuration Label

N/A

Row Adjust

RA

0 – 128

Display-Equipped

Print Control

N/A

Reflective TOF Bias

RB

0 – 50

Dots, model specific; see
Appendix K.
.1 Volt DC

Non-Display

14

N/A

Reflective TOF Delta

RD

0 – 50

.1 Volt DC

Non-Display

13

N/A

Ribbon Saver Enable

RE

A/Y, E, N/D

Enabled, Disabled

Display-Equipped

Printer Options

R

Row Adjust Finetune

RF

+ / – dots

Display-Equipped

Printer Control

N/A

Reflective TOF Gain

RG

0 – 15

Resolution specific; see
Appendix K.
.1 Volt DC

Non-Display

12

N/A

Ribbon Low

RL

1.00 – 2.00

1/100 in.

Media Settings

N/A

Display-Equipped

Table 5-1: Configuration Set Commands (continued)

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

41

Extended System-Level Command Functions

Kc
Parameter Name
Reflective No Paper
Minimum (Out Of Stock)

Configuration Set Commands
Units /
Applicable
Interpretation
Printer Type
.1 Volt DC
Non-Display

Parameter
Pneumonic
RN

Value /
Range
0 – 16

Equivalent Menu Item
or Menu Item Number
11

Command
Equivalent
N/A

Row Offset

RO

0 – 9999

1/100 in.

Display-Equipped

Print Control

Rnnnn

Ribbon Low Signal

RS

3, 4

Reflective Paper Value

RV

0 – 255

3 = Active Low,
4 = Active High
N/A

Display-Equipped

Print Options

N/A

Display-Equipped

Media Settings

N/A

SOP Adjust

SA

0 – 255

N/A

Non-Display

5

O

Scalable Cache

SC

100 – 8192
0 – 128

Kbytes
4 Kbytes (0 = disabled)

Display-Equipped
Non-Display

System Settings
16

N/A
KS

SOP Emulation

SE

L, A, P, D

Display-Equipped

System Settings

N/A

Save As Filename

SF

String

L = Prodigy Plus,
A = Allegro,
P = Prodigy, D = Disable
Up to 16 characters

Display-Equipped

System Settings

N/A

Sensor Gain Value

SG

0 – 32

N/A

Display-Equipped

Media Settings

N/A

Scalable Heap

SH

0 – 9999

Kbytes

Display-Equipped

N/A

N/A

Security Lock

SL

Y, N

Enabled, Disabled

Display-Equipped

System Settings

N/A

A, H

Auto, Host

Non-Display

20

N/A

C, H, M, D,
B, V
xyz

See Table 5-5.

Display-Equipped

Printer Options

N/A

See Table 5-6.

Display-Equipped

Communications

N/A

Non-Display

7 and 8

KD

Stop Location
Scanner Configuration

SN

Serial Port

SP

Table 5-1: Configuration Set Commands (continued)

42

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Extended System-Level Command Functions

Kc
Parameter Name
Slew Speed

Parameter
Pneumonic
SS or sS

Sensor Type

ST

Value /
Range
alpha
character
G, C, R

Configuration Set Commands
Units /
Applicable
Interpretation
Printer Type
Model specific ranges; see
Display-Equipped
Appendix L.
Gap (edge),
Display-Equipped
Continuous,
Reflective
Non-Display

Equivalent Menu Item
or Menu Item Number
Print Control

Command
Equivalent
Sa

Media Settings
2

e,
r,
KD

TOF Bias

TB

0 – 50

.1 Volt DC

Non-Display

14

N/A

TOF Delta

TD

0 – 50

.1 Volt DC

Non-Display

13

N/A

TOF Gain

TG

0 – 15

.1 Volt DC

Non-Display

12

N/A

No Paper Min (Out Of
Stock)

TN

0 – 16

.1 Volt DC

Non-Display

11

N/A

TOF Precedence

TP

Y, N

Enabled, Disabled

Display-Equipped

N/A

N/A

Unit of Measure

UM

M, I

Metric, Imperial

Display-Equipped

System Settings

User Terminator

UT

ON

N/A

Display-Equipped

N/A

m,
n
N/A

Verifier Equip

VE

A/Y, E, N/D

Enabled, Disabled

Display-Equipped

Printer Options

KV

Verifier Type

VT

A, B, C, D

Reserved for future use

Display-Equipped

Reserved for future use

N/A

Table 5-1: Configuration Set Commands (concluded)

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

43

Extended System-Level Command Functions

Kc Parameter Overviews
(AL) Alignment Length – Critical for small labels when ‘Label Alignment’ is set to ‘Yes,’ this
command allows a length, measured from leading edge to leading edge of two successive labels
to be entered. The measured length must be provided to the nearest hundredth of an inch. For
very small labels, errors as small as 0.01” can result in noticeable print variations on the labels
between the media sensor and the printhead. The number of labels that can be fit between the
Media Sensor and the printhead will magnify any error in label alignment length. Errors are more
favorable on the low side than on the high side.

(AS) Single Byte Symbol Set – This command allows for a default single-byte symbol set. See
y or ySxx for command details.

(BA) Backup After Print – When the present distance is set with the GPIO enabled, this
command determines the timing of the label back up. When enabled, the printer immediately
backs up the label after the applicator-issued start of print signal is received, resulting in faster
throughput. If disabled, the printer will not initiate repositioning until the next label is ready to
print (may help prevent the curling of the label edge).

(BL) Backup Label – This command determines the timing of the label back up when the GPIO 1
option is installed and enabled. When enabled, the interface supports an input signal that allows
the printer to back up a label once it has been presented.

(BP) British Pound – This command, when enabled, will automatically switch from the Number
symbol (#) found at 0x23 (default PC-850 Multilingual Symbol Set) to the British Pound symbol
(£) at 0x9C.

(BS or bS) Backup Speed – This command controls the rate of label movement during backup
positioning for start of print, cutting or present distance; see Appendix C for available speed
ranges.

(BZ) Buzzer Enable – This command controls the audible signaling device that acknowledges
User Interface entries and, if enabled, sounds printer warning and fault conditions.

44

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Extended System-Level Command Functions

(CA) Column Adjust – This command fine-tunes the Column Offset setting by shifting both the
horizontal start of print position and the Label Width termination point to the right in dots (see
Appendix K) to compensate for slight mechanical differences sometimes evident if multiple
printers share label formats.

(CC) Control Codes – This command, depending upon printer type, allows a change to the prefix
of the software commands interpreted by the printer:
Units / Interpretation
Standard Codes
Alternate Codes
Alternate Codes 2

Definition
Hex 01 = SOH command; Hex 02 = STX command; count-by = ^; Hex 1B =
ESC; Hex 0x0D = Carriage Return
Hex 5E = SOH command; Hex 7E = STX command; count-by = @;
Hex 1B = ESC; Hex 0x0D = Carriage Return
Hex 5E = SOH command; Hex 7E = STX command; count-by = @;
Hex 1B = ESC; Hex 0x7C = Carriage Return

(CE) Cutter Equipped – A or Y - automatically senses device presence; if undetected, no error is
generated. E - enables the device, its presence must be detected; otherwise a fault is generated. N
or D - disables device detection. Note that the value range for non-display printers is Y, N only.
See V for command details.

(CH) Comm Heat Commands – This command causes the printer to disable the DPL Heat
command; instead, the Heat value is controlled via the menu setting.

(CL) Continuous Label Length – See c for command details.

(CO) Column Offset – See Cnnnn for command details.

(CS) Comm Speed Commands – This command causes the printer to disable the DPL speed
commands (Print, Feed, Slew, and Reverse); instead, the speed values are controlled via the menu
setting.

(CT) Comm TOF Commands – This command causes the printer to disable the DPL TOF (Gap,
Continuous, and Reflective) command; instead, the sensor type is controlled via the menu setting.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

45

Extended System-Level Command Functions

(DE) DPI Emulation – This command allows printers with higher resolutions to emulate lower
print resolutions, as follows:
•
•

600 DPI can emulate 300 and 203 DPI resolutions
400 DPI can emulate a 203 DPI resolution

(DK) Darkness – This command controls the printhead strobe timing to fine-tune the HEAT
setting.

(DM) Default Module – See X for command details.

(DR) Delay Rate – This command sets the number of minutes to delay between multiple batch
printings of Quick Test Labels.

(DS) Double Byte Symbol Set – See y or ySxx for command details.

(EM) Input Mode – This command defines the type of printer language: Standard DPL
processing or Line Mode which exacts data terminated by a carriage return to be inserted in a
DPL template and printed.

(EN) End Character – This command terminates a Kc string.

(EP) End of Print – This command defines the programmable signal output that signifies the End
of Print (EOP) process:
Units / Interpretation
Active Low
Active High
Low Pulse
High Pulse

46

Definition
Outputs a logic low (zero) following printing.
Outputs a logic high (one) following printing.
Outputs a low pulse (approximately 30 milliseconds long) following printing.
Outputs a high pulse (approximately 30 milliseconds long) following printing.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Extended System-Level Command Functions

(EQ) Start of Print – This command defines the programmable signal input that controls the Start
of Print (SOP) process:
Units / Interpretation
Definition
Active Low
SOP signal must go low for at least 50 milliseconds to initiate printing.
Active High
SOP signal must go high for at least 50 milliseconds to initiate printing.

(ES) ESC Sequences – This command allows data containing invalid ESC control code
sequences to be processed (helpful because some systems send a “banner” to the printer). When
set to ‘Disabled,’ ESC sequences are ignored and the data is processed. Bitmapped font
downloads are disabled in this mode.

(ET) Exact Time – This command set the printer to wait until the system is idle before the next
label’s data and time fields are formatted to eliminate any discrepancy between the buffered and
printed times.

(EV) Empty Sensor Level – This command sets threshold value for the ‘Empty’ media sensor
parameter.

(FA) Format Attribute – See the An command for details.

(FE) Font Emulation –This command allows font substitution for all Datamax internal fonts,
allowing a new default font to be defined without changing the host DPL data streams. Selecting
a default font that supports a desired character set could match with third party software to print
native characters without modifying the PC drivers. In other words, match the PC font with the
Printer Font then no interpretation would be required by driver or printer. Depending on host
drivers, the user may have to disable Symbol Set commands and modify the Default Symbol set.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

47

Extended System-Level Command Functions

(FH) Fault Handling – When a fault condition (ribbon out, media out, etc.) is detected, this
command determines the level of intervention and the disposition of the label being printed at the
time the fault occurred.
Units /
Value Interpretation
x, y, z x – Interaction 0 = Standard
Level
1 = Void and
Retry

Definition
Printing stops and a fault message is displayed. After the
problem is corrected, the FEED Key must be pressed to
clear the fault. The label in process is reprinted.
Depending upon the RETRY COUNT, one of the
following actions when faulted:
• If the Retry Count setting has not been exceeded,
‘VOID’ is printed on the label in process and reprinting
occurs automatically;
• If the Retry Count has been exceeded, printing stops and
a fault message is displayed. After the problem is
corrected, the FEED Key must be pressed to clear the
fault. The label in process is reprinted; or,
• If the CANCEL Key is pressed the operator now has the
option of canceling the reprint:
To allow the reprint, press the ESCAPE Key or to cancel
the reprint, press the ENTER Key (the operator now has
the option of canceling the entire label batch by pressing
the ENTER Key again.)
þ Note: VOID will not be printed when insufficient space exists for
the height of the text (see VOID DISTANCE, below) or if the fault
occurred after the entire label was completed (i.e., when the label
reaches its Present Distance at or above the TOF).

2 = No
Reprint

Printing stops and a fault message is displayed. After the
problem is corrected, the FEED Key must be pressed to
clear the fault. The label in process is not reprinted.

y - Void
Distance

.10 - 2.00

z - Retry
Count

0-3

Sets the distance to backup the faulted label to print
‘VOID’ on its trailing edge, which also indirectly
establishes the font size of the void message.
Establishes the number of times the printer will attempt to
reprint a label. If the last label printed in this count has
been voided, the printer will stop and display a fault
message.

Table 5-2: Configuration Set Commands for Fault Handling
Example: KcFH112
(The example configures the printer to back up and print a one-inch “VOID” message on a
label when a fault is detected; if two successive faults occur during the printing of that label
then the FEED Key must be pressed to clear the fault.)

48

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Extended System-Level Command Functions

(FM) Feedback Mode – See a for command details.

(GE) GPIO Enable – This command is used to interface the printer to external controlling
devices (see Appendix J):
Units / Interpretation
Applicator
Verifier
Disabled

Definition
Enables the GPIO for a label applicator.
Enables the GPIO for a bar code verifier.
Disables the GPIO Port.

(GM) Gap / Mark Value – This command sets threshold value for the media sensor’s ‘gap /
mark’ parameter.

(GR) Gain Reflective Value – This command sets the sensitivity of the reflective media sensor.

(HB) Head Bias – This command instructs the printer to switch the dot zero position: as viewed
from the printer’s front panel (or label output side) – when dot zero occupies the left-most
location on the printhead then printing is left justified; when dot zero occupies the right-most
location, printing is right justified.

(HC) Head Cleaning – This command controls the printhead cleaning routine. The entered value
specifies the inch (or centimeter) count to reach before prompting a printhead cleaning. If the
number specified is exceeded three times, the printer will fault until cleaning is initiated.
þ Note: The number specified is multiplied by one thousand. Zero disables this function.

(HE) Heat – See Hnn for command details.

(HT) Host Timeout – This command controls the number of seconds a communications port must
be idle before the printer may process data from a different port. The value is also used to
“timeout” an image / label format download (i.e., if, at any time, data flow stops before a
complete label format is received, the data will be ignored).

(IC) Ignore Control Codes – This command allows the user to remove control codes (< 20 Hex)
in the data field. The selected line terminator is processed. When enabled, DPL Control Code
(SOH, STX, CR, ESC, and ^) characters are removed from the data string. (Note that some fonts
do have printable characters in this range and they will not be printed when enabled.)

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

49

Extended System-Level Command Functions

(IE) Ignore Distances – This command, when enabled, prevents O processing that will
change the start of print position.

(IL) Imaging Mode – This command instructs the printer whether to pre-image the label format:
Units / Interpretation
Multiple Label

Single Label

þ Note:

Definition
The printer images multiple labels as memory permits, achieving the
fastest throughput; however, if time-stamping, the time will reflect the
moment the label is imaged rather than when actually printed.
The printer images the next label only after the previous label has been
successfully printed. Single processing provides time-stamps that are more
accurate, but it slows label throughput time.

This selection can affect the accuracy of time-stamped labels and label throughput.

(IM) Internal Module – This command sets the number of 1K blocks (or 4K blocks for nondisplay models, see the KM command) allocated for the internal RAM ‘D’ module.

(LA) Label Alignment – This command prevents labels with lengths that are less than the
distance between the printhead and the Media Sensor from being wasted at power-up. See the
appropriate Operator’s Manual for detailed information.
Label
Alignment
Description
Setting
At power-up, printing will begin at the current label
Continuous stock; 6.5” or greater Disabled
position without any alignment (unless the RTC
die-cut, notched and reflective
option is installed).
stocks; multiple form lengths
6.5” or less die-cut, notched and Automatic Use for easy label length changes, and to
reflective stocks
automatically set the maximum label length. Press
and hold the FEED Key four seconds and the printer
will automatically measure the label length. Once
loaded and aligned subsequent power-ups will result
in no wasted labels.
Enabled
Use for constant label lengths. Specify the Label
Alignment Length using the KcAL command
or the Setup Menu. Press and hold the FEED Key
four seconds, or toggle printer power, and then the
printer will align with the specified length.
6.5” or less die-cut, notched and Automatic This mode of operation requires a Label Alignment
reflective stocks with the Present
Length or that Label Alignment be set to AUTO. If
Sensor enabled
either of these conditions is not met, the printer will
not perform the alignment.
Media Type,
Operation Mode

Table 5-3: Label Alignment Settings
þ Note:

50

The Real Time Clock (RTC) option allows the position-state of the label to be stored, thus
eliminating the need for an alignment prior to the printing of the first label (assuming the
label position has not moved while power was off). If the label stock has been changed
then a Forced Alignment (press and hold the FEED Key 4 seconds) is recommended.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Extended System-Level Command Functions

(LE) Legacy Emulation – This command enables the O and f print positioning
commands to allow backward compatibility with label formats that were designed for the
Allegro® Prodigy®, and Prodigy Plus® (If the printer is display-equipped, also Prodigy Max®
emulation).

(LS) Language Select – This command selects the language in which the menu system messages
and configuration label are shown. Only languages that are resident will be available.

(LW) Label Width – This command sets the maximum limit for the printable width. Objects
extending beyond this limit will NOT print; see Appendix K. (For non-display models also see
the KW command.)

(MC) Module Commands – This command adjusts the size of Flash module ‘Z’ on the optional
Expansion Card (see Appendix K for module details).

(ML) Maximum Label Length – See M for command details.

(MT) Media Type – This command selects the printing method: Direct Thermal for use with heat
sensitive media or Thermal Transfer for use with media requiring a ribbon to create an image.
(For non-display models also see the KD command.)

(MV) Mark Value – This command sets threshold value for the reflective media sensor’s ‘mark’
parameter.

(NS) Disable Symbol Set Selection – This command prevents the y and y commands
from changing the default single-byte symbol set. When enabled, DPL Symbol Set commands are
ignored. (Note that when enabled the only way to change the current symbol set is to use the
KcAS command.)

(PA) Present Adjust – This command fine-tunes the Present Distance setting to compensate for
slight mechanical differences sometimes evident if multiple printers share label formats.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

51

Extended System-Level Command Functions

(PC) Print Contrast – This command adjusts the relative print edge (gray) component of the print
quality, which allows fine-tuning for specific media/ribbon mix.

(PD) Present Distance – This command sets the label stop position past the start of print. When
the next label format is received, the printer will automatically backfeed to the start position. If
the present distance is set to zero, the printer will operate without reversing. (See Stop Location,
below).

(PE) Peel Mode – This command, when enabled, specifies that a Feed operation be prevented
when the label is presented and not removed, or if the printer is to wait for the GPIO start of print
signal.

(PL) Printer Level – This command is used to upgrade the software feature level of the printer.

(PM) Pause Mode – See J for command details.

(PO) Paper Out Distance – This command sets the length of travel before an out of stock
condition is declared.

(PP) Parallel Direction – This command controls the communications settings for the parallel
port(s):
Value

xDz

Units / Interpretation
x - A port ID
B port ID
z - U unidirectional (One-way printer communication)
B bidirectional (Enables IEEE 1284 back-channel operation)

Table 5-4: Parallel Communications Configuration Set Commands

(PS) Present Sensor Enable – A or Y - automatically senses device presence; if undetected, no
error is generated. E - enables the device, its presence must be detected; otherwise a fault is
generated. N or D - disables device detection. See V for command details. (Note that the
value range for non-display printers is Y, N only. Also see the KD command.)

(pS) Print Speed – See P for command details.

52

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Extended System-Level Command Functions

(PT) Tear Position – This command sets the label stopping location at the tear plate on the
printer’s cover.

(PV) Paper Value – This command sets threshold value for the media sensor’s ‘paper’ parameter.

(PW) Password – This command modifies the numeric password required to access the menu
system when security is enabled. If security is enabled, enter the new password followed by the
old password (with no spaces) in this form: XXXXXXXX

(QQ) Configuration Query – This command causes the printer to respond with the current
configuration settings. The Kc response command stream format is sent to the host
computer via the serial port containing all parameters controlled by the Kc command, and
may be used for restoring the printer’s configuration or for configuring other printers.

(RA) Row Adjust – This command shifts the vertical start of print position in dots (see Appendix
K) to fine-tune the Row Offset setting to compensate for slight mechanical differences sometimes
evident if multiple printers share label formats.

(RB) Reflective TOF Bias – This command allows the manual entry for the control voltage level
to recognize a label “gap” or “mark.”

(RD) Reflective TOF Delta – This command allows the manual entry for the control of the lowlevel voltage difference level to recognize a label “gap” or “mark.”

(RE) Ribbon Saver Enable – A or Y - automatically senses device presence; if undetected, no
error is generated. E - enables the device, its presence must be detected; otherwise a fault is
generated. N or D - disables device detection. See R for command details.

(RF) Row Adjust Finetune – This command shifts the vertical start of print position in dots (see
Appendix K) upward or downward to fine-tune the Row Offset setting to compensate for slight
mechanical differences sometimes evident if multiple printers share label formats.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

53

Extended System-Level Command Functions

(RG) Reflective TOF Gain – This command allows the manual entry for the control of the
voltage to the LED emitter of the Media Sensor.

(RL) Ribbon Low – This command sets the threshold for a low ribbon indication.

(RN) Reflective No Paper Minimum – This command sets the media sensor’s reading for the Out
Of Stock (OOS) condition.

(RO) Row Offset – See Rnnnn for command details.

(RS) Ribbon Low Signal – This command sets the signal output that signifies the Ribbon Low
Diameter condition for the optional GPIO (see Appendix J).

(RV) Reflective Paper Value – This command sets the threshold value for the reflective media
sensor’s paper parameter.

(SA) SOP Adjust – This command sets the start of print (SOP) location, relative to the top of
form. See O for command details.

(SC) Scalable Cache – This command sets the number of 1K blocks allocated for the scaleable
font engine. Available memory dependent upon model; see Appendix K. (For non-display models
see the KS command.)

(SE) SOP Emulation – This command enables the O and f print positioning
commands to allow backward compatibility with label formats designed for other printers.

(SF) Save As Filename – This command saves the effective configuration of the printer to a file,
storing it in Flash memory.

54

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Extended System-Level Command Functions

(SG) Sensor Gain Value – This command sets the control of the voltage to the LED emitter of
the Media Sensor.

(SH) Scalable Heap – This command sets a working “scratch pad space” in DRAM for scalable
font construction.

(SL) Security Lock – This command provides the ability to password protect all printer settings
made through the User Interface.

(SL) Stop Location – This command sets the label stopping (and in certain cases the starting)
location, as follows:
Setting
Host

Auto

Stop Location
Sets stop position according to options installed. If no options are installed the printer
sets stop location to the next label’s start of print. Host commands will override. The
stop location (present distance) may be controlled dynamically by the host using the
f or Kf commands. This selection has the same effect as KD
Ignore Host Distance bit value 0.
Automatically sets the stop location. Installed options will be ‘auto-sensed’ and the
appropriate stop position will automatically be set. Host commands are ignored.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

55

Extended System-Level Command Functions

(SN) Scanner Configuration – This command configures the optional linear scanner as follows:
Value
C, H, M, D,
B, V

Range / Interpretation
C bar code count (number of codes to be read):
00 – 99 (00 = Auto [variable] mode)
þ Note: Do not use Auto Mode with bitmapped codes or codes with certain addendums;
see Appendix F.

H min readable height (sets the vertical distance of the code that must have identical reads):
1 - 1/16
2 - 2/16
3 - 3/16
4 - 1/4
5 - 1/2
0 - Disabled (defaults to Redundancy Level 2x)
þ Note: The selected distance should not exceed 50% of the measured bar code height

M mode (enables scanner detection by the printer):
A - auto (automatically senses presence); Y is also a valid enabler
E - enabled (presence must be detected or a fault is generated)
D - disabled (scanner disabled); N is also a valid disabler
D direct command
ab - reserved for future use
B bar codes (specifies the bar code, two digits) followed by ‘Y’ to enable or ‘N’ to disable the
code
01 - CODE 39
02 - IATA
03 - CODABAR
04 - INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5
05 - INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5
06 - CODE 93
07 - CODE 128
08 - MSI/PLESSEY
09 - EAN(13/8)
10 - EAN(13/8)+2
11 - EAN(13/8)+5
12 - UPC(A/E)
13 - UPC(A/E)+2
14 - UPC(A/E)+5
þ Note: To maximize throughput and decoding integrity enable only those symbologies
that will be read.

V redundancy level (alternative method to ensure data integrity where the selected level sets a
number of consecutive, identical decodes required to pass the bar code; if a different value is
read then the count is restarted).
þ Note: Depending upon the print speed, higher levels may cause erroneous failures when
scanning multiple or small bar codes.

012345-

Auto Mode
read bar code 1X
read bar code 2X
read bar code 3X
read bar code 4X
read bar code 5X

6 7 8 9 AB-

read bar code 6X
read bar code 8X
read bar code 10X
read bar code 12X
read bar code 15X
read bar code 20X

CDEF G-

read bar code 25X
read bar code 30X
read bar code 35X
read bar code 40X
read bar code 45X

Table 5-5: Scanner Configuration Set Commands
Example: KcSNC00H4MAB12YV0

56

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Extended System-Level Command Functions

(The above sample sets the printer to sense the scanner automatically, to read a variable
number of UPC bar codes codes, and to pass only those codes where ¼ inch of the bar code has
identical reads.)

(SP) Serial Port – This command configures the serial communication port(s) as follows:
Range /
Interpretation

Value
xyz

xyzz

Example

x - A port ID
Example:
B port ID
KcSPAPB;SPApN;SPAD8;SPAS1;SPAB19
y - P protocol (handshaking)
z - type:
B - both
(The example configures Serial Port A to use hardware
S - software and software handshaking, an eight-bit word, with no
H - hardware parity and one stop bit at 19,200 bits per second.)
N - none
y - p parity
þ Notes:
z - type:
N - none
E-Class and M-Class printer models – this command is
O - odd
followed by the port ID, always ‘A’ (i.e., SPA).
E - even
y - D data length
A-Class printer models – this command is also used to
configure the GPIO Auxiliary port (ID always ‘B’).
z - value:
8 - bits
7 - bits
y - S stop bits
z - value:
1 - bit
2 - bits
y - B baud rate
zz - value: 12 - 1200
24 - 2400
48 - 4800
96 - 9600
19 - 19200
28 - 28800
38 - 38400

Table 5-6: Serial Port Configuration Set Commands
Example: KcSPAD8
The above sample sets the serial port A to receive eight-bit words (the host computer
communications setup is expected to be the same).

(SS or sS) Slew Speed – This command controls the rate of label movement between printing
areas; see Appendix L.

(ST) Sensor Type – See e (edge) or r (reflective) for command details. (For nondisplay models also see the KD command.)

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

57

Extended System-Level Command Functions

(TB) TOF Bias – This command controls the low-level voltage difference level to recognize a
label ‘gap’ or ‘mark’.

(TD) TOF Delta – This command controls the low-level voltage difference level to recognize a
label ‘gap’ or ‘mark’.

(TG) TOF Gain – This command controls the voltage to the LED emitter of the Media Sensor.

(TN) No Paper Min – This command sets the media sensor level for the Out Of Stock (OOS)
condition.

(TP) TOF Precedence – This command instructs the firmware to stop printing at the first top of
form mark it detects. The default, ‘No,’ prints all of the data then slows to the next TOF.

(UM) Units of Measure – See m (metric) or n (imperial) for command details.

(UT) User Terminator – This command allows word wrapping of long character strings of
commands to the next line in a file, for the purposes of readability only. In the Kc string,
the command UTON must fall somewhere before the first line terminator. The last command
needs to be END, followed by a line terminator (see the KcEN command for details).

(VE) Verifier Equip – A or Y - automatically senses device presence; if undetected, no error is
generated. E - enables the device, its presence must be detected; otherwise a fault is generated. N
or D - disables device detection. This command enables the GPIO for a bar code verifier (see
Appendix J).

(VT) Verifier Type – This command is reserved for future use.

58

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Extended System-Level Command Functions

STX KD

Database Configuration (Non-Display Models only)

This command, stored in Flash memory for future power-ups, controls the printer’s environment and
operates as a pseudo DIP switch. The Kc command is recommended for use over KD.
Syntax:

KDwxyz

Where:

w, x, y, and z are binary values with respective bit settings as defined in
the following table. (Bit 0 is least significant.)

Sample:

KD@H@@

The sample configures the printer as follows:
@
H
@
@

Sets the communications to 9600 baud with an 8-bit word and no parity;
Selects direct thermal printing, standard control characters, and enables the media cutter;
Selects gap sensing;
Is the default setting (items saved for future expansion).

þ Note:

KD
Parameter

Bit
Number

Parameter
Function

Parameter
Value(s)

w

0–2

BAUD Rate / Set Test Mode

3
4&5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0&1
2
3–5
6
7
0&1
2
3–5
6
7

Word Length and Parity
Unused
Always 1
Always 0
Print Method
Present Sensor
Control Character [1]
Cutter
Ignore Host Distance
Alt-2 Control Codes[1]
Always 1
Always 0
Paper Type (Media Sensor)
Linerless
Unused
Always 1
Always 0
Reserved
Reserved
Unused
Always 1
Always 0

0 = 9600, 1 = 600, 2 = 2400, 3 = 19200,
4 = 4800, 5 = 38400, 6 = 1200,
7 = 9600 Test Mode
0 = 8 bits, no parity; 1 = 7 bits, even parity
Set to 0
Set to 1
Set to 0
0 = direct thermal, 1 = thermal transfer
0 = not equipped, 1 = equipped
0 = standard, 1 = alternate characters
0 = disabled, 1 = enabled
0 = disabled, 1 = enabled (See note above)
0 = disabled, 1 = alternate-2 characters
Set to 1
Set to 0
0 = gap (edge), 1 = reflective, 2 = continuous
0 = not equipped, 1 = equipped
Set to 0
Set to 1
Set to 0
Set to 0
Set to 0
Set to 0
Set to 1
Set to 0

x

y

z

[1]

The Ignore Host Distance setting (see below) allows the printer to disregard O and f
commands; a feature provided for host system software that sends these commands with values
that may be inappropriate for the printer and result in incorrect start of print and present distances.
Use the KD command or the Setup Menu to enable this feature.

Selects the values of the control characters; see Control Codes.

Table 5-7: KD Configuration Commands

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

59

Extended System-Level Command Functions

STX Kd

Set File as Factory Default

(Display-Equipped Models only)
This command selects the specified file name as the “factory default” for the printer’s configuration.
After execution, subsequent “Select Factory Default” commands will configure the printer to the
file’s configuration. Currently there are three ways to “Select Factory Defaults”: 1) by the KF
command; 2) power-up the printer while pressing the PAUSE and CANCEL Keys; or, 3) via the
printer’s menu system entry System Settings / Set Factory Defaults.
þ Note: Powering ‘On’ the printer while pressing the PAUSE, FEED and CANCEL Keys will reset the
configuration to the factory defaults.

Syntax:

KdName

Where:

Name

- The name, up to 16 characters, of the configuration file.



- 0x0d terminates the name.

Sample:

KdPlant1

This command selects the configuration file “Plant1” as the default factory configuration.

STX KE

Character Encoding

This command is provided primarily as a means for users of 7-bit communication and to embed
control characters and extended ASCII characters in their data streams. Any character in the DPL
datastream may be substituted with a delimited two-character ASCII hexadecimal numeric
equivalent. The command allows the delimiting character to be selected, and the encoding to be
enabled or disabled. When character encoding is enabled, the printer will decode any ASCII
hexadecimal numeric pairs following the delimiter as single-byte values. Character encoding is used
where control characters cannot be transmitted or where control characters within data may
prematurely terminate a label format record. Although the delimiter may be changed at any time
(except within a label format definition), there cannot be more than one defined delimiter, and
character encoding must be disabled with KEN prior to re-enabling, regardless of any change
in the delimiter.

60

Syntax:

KEex

Where:

e

-

Y – character encoding enabled
N – character encoding disabled

x

-

Delimiter: one ASCII character (Do not include when e = N)

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Extended System-Level Command Functions

KEN
KEY\
L
1u0000001200120[)>\1E\01\1D\...\04\
E

Sample:

The sample disables, and then enables character encoding with the backslash (\) as the delimiter. A
UPS MaxiCode will be formatted using a data string interpreted as: [)>RS01GS... EOT, then
formatting is terminated.
Character Encoding Syntax: This syntax requires at least two hexadecimal ASCII digits (0-9, A-F)
delimited by the character specified in the KE command. The number of hexadecimal digits
between the delimiter pair must be even; see notes below.
Syntax:

xaa[bbcc…nn]x

Where:

x

- One byte delimiter, 0 to ff16, leading and trailing.

aa

-

2 bytes, ASCII, hexadecimal encoded, range each character 0-9, A-F

bb

-

2 bytes, ASCII, hexadecimal encoded, range each character 0-9, A-F (optional)

cc

-

2 bytes, ASCII, hexadecimal encoded, range each character 0-9, A-F (optional)

nn

-

2 bytes, ASCII, hexadecimal encoded, range each byte - 0-9,
A-F (optional)

þ Notes: (1) A delimiter pair with no ASCII hexadecimal pairs between (e.g., \\) will be interpreted as one
byte whose value is that of the delimiting character, allowing the assigned delimiter to be
interpreted as itself rather than as the delimiter.
(2) A delimited string that contains either a non-valid hexadecimal character (e.g., FX) or an odd
number of bytes will be treated as an illegal string and, therefore, not correctly decoded.

Character Encoding Examples: In the following partial datastreams it is assumed that character
encoding is enabled and that the selected delimiter, a backslash (\), has been transmitted to the
printer (i.e., KEY\). In each example, the printer has not received an unpaired delimiter prior
the example.
Partial DPL
Sample Data Stream
AB\\CE
\ABCDEF\
1A\1A\1A

Interpretation
5 bytes AB\CE with values 4116, 4216, 5C16, 4316, 4416
3 bytes with values AB16, CD16, and EF16
5 bytes 1A1A with values 3116, 4116, 1A16, 3116, 4116.
 represents a single-byte ASCII control character with value 1A16

Alternate Control Codes with Alternate Line Terminator: Character Encoding can also be used
with the Alternate Control Character set. Alternate Control Characters are enabled, depending upon
the model, via a Setup Menu or the KD / Kc commands. See Control Codes.

STX KF

Select Factory Defaults

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

61

Extended System-Level Command Functions

(Display-Equipped Models only)
This command restores the printer’s configuration to the “factory default” settings. These factory
default values may be either the Datamax default settings or the configuration file previously
specified in the Kd command.
Syntax:

STX Kf

KF

Set Present Distance

This command specifies an additional amount to advance the label after printing. This command has
the same effect as the f command, but specifies a distance to advance relative to the start of
print (O command) of the next label.
Syntax:

Kfnnnn

Where:

nnnn

Sample:

Kf0100

- A four-digit present distance in inches/100 or mm/10.

The sample represents a one-inch label advance unless in metric mode (see m).

62

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Extended System-Level Command Functions

STX Kp

Module Protection

(Display-Equipped Models only)
This command controls memory module protection. When “protected”, a module will ignore format,
downloads and delete commands. This command can be useful to add data to Datamax reserved
modules, Z (ILPC) and Y (EFIGS). See Appendix K for a listing of the memory modules.
There are two types of modules: RAM (volatile) and Flash (non-volatile).
Ÿ

RAM - When protected, if the power is cycled or if the printer is reset, the module state resets
back to unprotected.

Ÿ

Flash - When protected, the module can be temporarily unprotected. However, if the power is
cycled or if the printer is reset, the module is initialized to ‘protected.’ To clear the protected state
forever, the module must be unprotected and then formatted.

Syntax:

Kpmf

Where:

m

-

Module ID – Range A to Z (See Appendix K).

Where:

f

-

Flag specifying Enable or Disable protection.
0 – disable protection
1 – enable protection

Sample:

KpY0

This example disables protection for memory module “Y”. Graphics may now be downloaded to
module “Y” and, on subsequent resets, these graphics will be protected.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

63

Extended System-Level Command Functions

STX KQ

Query Memory Configuration

This command causes the printer to transmit DRAM memory configuration to the host device
regarding the total amount installed, the amount available for configuration, and the amount currently
assigned to specific functions or entities. The printer’s response format is model dependent.
Syntax:

KQ

Non-display model
response format:

INTERNAL MEMORY
VER: aa-cdd.ee mm/dd/yy
INSTALLED: iiii
AVAILABLE: vvvv
MODULE: X:xxxx
SCALABLE: ssss
LABEL MEM: LLLL
LABEL SIZE: wwww:gggg:oo

Where:



- ASCII Carriage Return (0x0D) record delimiter.

aa- ASCII string sequence that represents the firmware version
cdd.ee
number string.
mm/dd/yy
iiii
- The number of 4KB blocks of DRAM memory.

64

vvvv

- The number of 4KB blocks of DRAM available for
configuration.

X:

- ASCII character identifying a DRAM module followed by an
ASCII colon (:). If no Internal Module is present, this field
and its associated legend will not appear.

xxxx

- The number of 4KB blocks of DRAM allocated as an
Internal Module.

ssss

- The number of 4KB blocks of DRAM assigned to the
smooth scalable font processor cache.

LLLL

- The number of 4KB blocks of DRAM assigned to label print
buffer.

wwww

- Current maximum printable label width (in 100ths of an inch
or millimeters).

gggg

- Current printable length (in 100ths of an inch or millimeters),
200 min. / 640 max.

oo

- Current label dimension unit’s designation: “IN” for inches
or “MM” for millimeters.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Extended System-Level Command Functions

Product: I4208 – 01.01 05/21/1999
Display-equipped
model response format: Installed RAM: 8 MB
Label Width: 4.09 IN
Print Buffer Size: 272 IN
Allocation RAM: 6389 KB
Internal Files: 512 KB
Font Cache:
232 KB
Where:
Product

- Printer model, type and firmware revision level.

Installed
RAM

- Total amount of RAM.

Label Width

- Size in inches/millimeters of the printhead.

Print
Buffer Size

Total number of inches/millimeters of Print Dot
- Buffers available. (This is not the maximum size of
a label, which is limited to 99.99 inches.)

Allocation
RAM

Amount of RAM that can be configured for the
- Internal Files, Font Cache and the remainder going
to the Print Buffer Size.

Internal
Files

- Size of the Internal Module used to store
downloaded fonts, graphics and label formats.

Font Cache

- Size of the Font Buffer used to temporarily store
characters. Increasing this buffer will increase
performance if labels have a large variety of font
sizes and characters.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

65

Extended System-Level Command Functions

STX Kq

Query Memory Configuration (new format)

(Display-Equipped Models only)
This command causes the printer to transmit its internal DRAM memory configuration to the host
device. The transmitted data provides information regarding the total amount of internal DRAM
installed, the amount available for configuration, and the amount currently assigned to specific
functions or entities.
Syntax:

Kq

Printer response format: Memory Configuration
Product: aaaacdd.ee mm/dd/yy
Installed RAM: iiiiMB
Label Width: vvvvoo
Print Buffer Size: :xxxxoo
Allocation RAM: ssssKB
Internal Files LLLLKB
Font Cache wwww:KB
Where:



- ASCII Carriage Return (0x0D) record delimiter.

aaaacdd.ee - ASCII string sequence that represents the firmware
mm/dd/yy
version number string.

STX KR

iiii

- The number of Megabytes of installed internal DRAM
memory.

vvvv

- The length of the Label Width.

xxxx

- The length of the Print Buffer.

ssss

- The number of Kilobytes of internal memory assigned to
the label Print Buffer

LLLL

- The number of Kilobytes assigned to the internal memory
module.

wwww

- The number of Kilobytes assigned to the Scalable Cache.

oo

- Current label dimension unit’s designation. “IN” for inches
and “MM” for millimeters.

Reset Memory Configuration

(Non-Display Models only)
This command resets the printer’s DRAM configuration to the default settings, see KM.
Syntax:

66

KR

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Extended System-Level Command Functions

STX Kr

Resettable Counter Reset

This command resets the internal counters. Follow this command with an U command to
retain the reset or the counters will revert to the previous values after cycling power.
Syntax:

STX KS

Kr

Memory Configuration, Scalable Font Cache

(Non-Display Models only)
See the K command.

STX KV

Verifier Enable/Disable

(Display-Equipped Models only)
This command allows the verifier (option, if installed), to be enabled and disabled.
Syntax:

KVa

Where:

a

STX KW

-

Y = verifier enable
N = verifier disable

Memory Configuration, Printable Label Width

(Non-Display Models only)
See the K command.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

67

Extended System-Level Command Functions

STX Kx

Delete Configuration File

(Display-Equipped Models only)
This command deletes the specified configuration file.
Syntax:

KxmName

Where:

m

-

Valid Module ID – Range A to Z.

Name

-

The name, up to 16 characters, of the configuration file.



-

0x0d terminates the name.

Sample:

KxYPlant1

This command deletes the configuration file Plant1 located on Module Y. (Remember to prefix this
command with the Module (Un)Protect Command Kp).

68

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Label Formatting Command Functions

Introduction
The L command switches the printer from the System-Level Processor to the Label Formatting
Processor. All commands following the L are interpreted as label formatting commands, and can be
used to override default parameter values. Selectable parameter value defaults may be also reassigned via
the Setup Menu, as defined in the corresponding Operator’s Manual. Label formats that contain no
commands overriding printer default values will assume those defaults.

:

Set Cut By Amount
This command allows a predetermined number of labels to be printed before a cut is initiated. This
feature is useful when it is necessary to print an uncut strip of labels. Between 1 and 9999 labels may
be printed before a cut is made. The amount must be smaller than the quantity of labels printed.
Syntax:

:nnnn

Where:

nnnn

Sample:

L
:0005
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL
Q0021
E

- Is a four digit decimal number indicating the number of labels to
be printed before a cut is performed.

The sample instructs the printer to make a cut after 5, 10, and 20 labels have been printed. Label 21
will be cut at the start of a subsequent label format (batch) unless a default (cut by amount) greater
than one has been entered.
þ Note: The cutter must be enabled and all mechanism interlocks closed for operation.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

69

Label Formatting Command Functions

A

Set Format Attribute
This command specifies the type of format operation and remains in effect until another format
command is specified or another label format has begun (L). Each label format defaults to
attribute 2 (Transparent Mode).
Syntax:

An

Where:

n

Sample:

L
A3
141100001000100DATAMAX
141100001100110DATAMAX
E

-

Is attribute mode 1, 2, 3, or 5; see table below.
The default is 1, (XOR Mode).

The sample sets the printer to Opaque Mode and produces one label.
n
1

2

3

5

70

Attribute
XOR
Mode

Description
In this mode, the region where text strings, images
or bar codes intersect will not be printed. (An odd
number of overlapping objects will print.)
Transparent This is the default mode; the intersecting regions of
Mode
text strings, images, and bar codes will print,
allowing the user to print fields on top of one
another.
Opaque
Interacting text is obliterated by the text formatted
Mode
last. Each character cell is treated as opaque. This
mode is effective only in rotation 1. See Record
Structure Types.
Inverse
This mode allows inverse (white on black) printing
Mode
(e.g., a proportionally sized border and background
are printed similar to photographic negative). If text
or image fields overlap in this mode, the effect will
be similar to the XOR mode.
Table 6-1: Format Attributes

Example

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Label Formatting Command Functions

B

Bar Code Magnification

(Display-Equipped Models only)
This command provides a mechanism to specify bar codes greater than 36 dots (0-9,A-Z in the field
record). The value is reset to 1 at the start of every label and stays active for the entire label or set to a
new value.
Syntax:

Bnn

Where:

nn

Sample:

L
D11
B01
1a9305000100030ABCD
B03
1a3105000700030ABCD
Q0001
E

-

Is a two digit decimal number indicating the magnification
value.

The sample instructs the printer to print two bar codes, each 9 dots by 3 dots.

C

Set Column Offset Amount
This command allows horizontal adjustment of the point where printing begins. The printer is
instructed to print label formats nnnn units to the right of the position that the format specifies. This
feature is useful when a single format is to be printed on labels containing preprinted information.
þ Note: If using preprinted labels where the placement of the preprint data varies from label to label, the
printed information may overlap the preprinted data.

Syntax:

Cnnnn

Where:

nnnn

Sample:

L
C0050
141100001000100DATAMAX

-

Is a four-digit number for the column offset, inches/100 or
mm/10. The printer default is 0 for offset.

The sample shifts all format data 0.5 inches to the right, unless the printer is in metric mode, (see
Label Formatting Command ‘m’).

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

71

Label Formatting Command Functions

c

Set Cut By Amount
This command is the same as the ‘:’ command except only a two-digit value can be entered. This
command allows a predetermined number of labels to be printed before a cut is made. 1 to 99 labels
may be printed before a cut is made.
Syntax:

cnn

Where:

nn

Sample

L
c07
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL
Q0021
E

-

Is a two-digit number indicating the number of labels to be
printed before a cut is made. The printer default is one.

The sample instructs the printer to make cuts after labels 7, 14, and 21 have been printed. See Label
Formatting Command ‘:’.
þ Note: The cutter must be enabled and all mechanism interlocks closed for the cut operation.

D

Set Dot Size Width and Height
This command is used to change the size of a printed dot, hence the print resolution – dots per inch
(DPI) of the printhead. By changing the height of a dot, the maximum length of a label can be
increased or decreased. For the element sizes see Appendix K.
Syntax:

Dwh

Where:

w

-

Is Dot Width multiplier 1 or 2.

h

-

Is Dot Height multiplier 1, 2, or 3.

þ Note: D11 is the default value for 300, 400 and 600 DPI printer models, while D22 is the default value for
all 203 DPI printer models.

72

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Label Formatting Command Functions

E

Terminate Label Formatting Mode and Print Label
This command causes the printer, when the processing Label Formatting commands, to terminate the
Label Formatting Mode then generate, print, and feed a label. The label generated will be based on
whatever data has been received to that point, even if no printable data has been received. Other
termination commands are ‘X’ and ‘s’. Commands sent to the printer after the Terminate Label
command must be of the Immediate, System-Level, or Font Download type.
Syntax:

E

Sample:

L
121100000000000Testing
E

The sample will print one label.

e

Recall Printer Configuration

(Display-Equipped Models only)
This command recalls a previously stored printer configuration. It is highly recommended that only
one Recall Printer Configuration command be used per label, and that it be used at the beginning of the
label; otherwise, unpredictable results will occur. (Printer configurations may be stored using the
Extended System Commands or the printer’s menu system.)
Syntax:

eName

Where:

Name

-

The name, up to 16 characters, of the configuration file.



-

0x0d terminates the name.

Sample:

L
ePlant1
1A2210001000000Testing
E

The sample recalls the stored printer configuration, Plant1.

F

Advanced Format Attributes
These commends extend the text presentation capabilities for Scalable Fonts. The format attribute
allows a set of label format records to select Bolding, Italicizing and Underlining. Additional
commands allow the specification of line rotation and font changes within a label field. Reference
Section 8.0, Generating Label Formats / Advanced Format Attributes for details.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

73

Label Formatting Command Functions

f

Set Present Speed

(Non-Display Models only)
This command controls the rate at which the present distance is positioned, allowing the media
movement to be slowed during ‘presentation’ (the distance traveled after printing is completed to the
label stop position). This command is used only within the context of a label format. The speed
assigned is retained until another label format is received or until power is removed; if a subsequent
format does not contain a present speed command then the present speed reverts to the slew speed.
Syntax:

fa

Where:

a

Sample:

LD11H30PGSG
fA
191100200830165Fixed Data Field 1
E
L
191100200830165Fixed Data Field 1
E

-

Is a single alpha character representing a speed, limited by the
slew speed range; see Appendix L. The default is the slew speed.

The sample prints two labels; the first label has present speed of 1 inch per second, while the second
reverts to the slew speed of 4 inches per second.

G

Place Data in Global Register
The ‘G’ command saves the print data of a print format record in a global register (temporary storage).
This data may be retrieved and copied to another record in the same label format using the special
Label Formatting Command, S. Global registers are named in the order received, beginning
with register A, ending at register P, and incrementing with each instance of the G command use.
Syntax:

G

Sample:

L
121100000000000Testing
G
1A2210001000000SA
E

The sample stores, retrieves and prints the data in global register A. One label is printed with
“Testing” in two locations.

74

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Label Formatting Command Functions

H

Enter Heat Setting
This command changes the “on time” of elements of the printhead. The default setting is 10 (except in
the case of printers with a menu, where the default setting can be changed through the keypad). An
increase or decrease in this value results in a change of heat applied by the printhead to the media,
lightening or darkening the print contrast accordingly. This is helpful when using different media
types, each requiring a different amount of heat to properly image the media. The host device can send
this command value to correct the heat setting per the application.
Syntax:

Hnn

Where:

nn

Sample:

L
H15
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL
E

-

Is a two-digit heat value (00-30)

The sample sets the printer for a heat value of 15 and prints one label.
þ Note: Non-Display Models – the “Darkness Potentiometer,” while providing subtle changes, is intended to
be used to match print contrast levels following printhead replacements.

J

Justification
This command changes the printing justification.
þ Note: Display-Equipped Models – This command is only valid for use with scalable fonts.

Syntax:

Ja

Where:

a

Sample:

L
1911A1801001000TEST1
JR
1911A1801000100TEST2
JC
1911A1802000200TEST3
E

-

Is a single-digit alpha character:
L = left justified (default)
R = right justified
C = center justified

The sample’s first text field “TEST1” will be printed at one inch up, one inch over going right. The
second text “TEST2” will be printed at one inch up one inch over, going left. (Note the characters
will not be reversed.) The third field “TEST3” will be centered on the point two inches up two inches
over.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

75

Label Formatting Command Functions

M

Select Mirror Mode
This command instructs the printer to “mirror” all subsequent print field records. This command
toggles the mirroring mode. Mirrored fields are transposed visually, as if the object is viewed in a
mirror.
Syntax:

M

Sample:

L
161100003200010 NOT MIRRORED
M
161100003000400 MIRRORED
E

Printed Result:

m

Set Metric Mode
This command sets the printer to measure in metric. When this command is sent, all measurements
will be interpreted as metric values, (e.g., a column offset of 0010 will be interpreted as 1.0 mm). All
printers default to Imperial (inch) mode.
Syntax:

m

Sample:

L
m
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL
E

The sample prints the text (SAMPLE LABEL) starting at location coordinates 10.0 mm, 10.0 mm.

n

Set Inch (Imperial) Mode
This command sets the printer to measure in inches. When this command is sent, all measurements
will change to inches. All printers default to Imperial units. Menu selectable.
Syntax:

n

Sample:

L
n
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL
E

The sample prints the text (SAMPLE LABEL) starting at location coordinates 1.0 inch, 1.0 inch.

76

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Label Formatting Command Functions

P

Set Print Speed
This command sets a print speed for a label or batch of labels.
Syntax:

Pa

Where:

a

Sample:

L
PC
141100001000100LABEL1
E
L
141100001000100LABEL2
E

-

Is a single character representing a speed; see Appendix L for
valid ranges.

The sample prints two labels, the first at a speed of 2 inches per second (51 mm per second) and the
second at the printer default.

p

Set Backfeed Speed
This command, typically used in conjunction with the Cut or Peel and Present operations, controls the
rate at which the labels will reverse to align to the next start of print position. The setting remains in
effect until another backfeed speed command is received or until the printer is reset.
Syntax:

pa

Where:

a

Sample:

L
pF

-

Is a single alpha character representing a speed; see Appendix
L for valid ranges.

The sample sets the printer to a backup speed of 3.5 IPS.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

77

Label Formatting Command Functions

Q

Set Quantity Of Labels To Print
This command sets the number of the label copies to be printed. A one to five digit value is allowed, if
the command is delimited by a carriage return . This permits host applications to generate label
quantity commands without the need to pad leading zeros. (A four-digit command value does not need
to be  terminated.)
Syntax:

Qnnnnn

Where:

nnnnn

Sample:

L
121100000000000Testing
Q0020
E

- Is a one to five-digit delimited value setting for the number of
labels to be printed. The default value is one.

The sample will print a batch of 20 identical labels.

R

Set Row Offset Amount
This command allows vertical adjustment of the point where printing begins. The printer is instructed
to print label formats nnnn units above the position that the format specifies. This feature is useful
when a single format is to be printed on labels containing preprinted information.
þ Note: If using preprinted labels where the placement of the preprint data varies from label to label, the
printed information may overlap the preprinted data.

Syntax:

Rnnnn

Where:

nnnn

Sample:

L
R0037
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL
E

-

Is a four-digit number (0000-9999) for the row offset, in
inches/100 or millimeters/10. The printer default is 0.

The sample prints a label with a row offset amount of .37 inches, unless in metric mode.

78

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Label Formatting Command Functions

r

Recall Stored Label Format
This command is used to retrieve label formats stored on a memory module.
Syntax:

rnn...n

Where:

nn…n

-

Is a label name, up to 16 characters in length.

The samples below explain different ways to recall and print a label format. (To view a memory
module’s directory of label formats use the W command.)
String Sent:

Printer Interpretation:

Sample 1:

L
rTEST
Q0002
E

Begin label format
Retrieve format named TEST
Quantity requested = 2
Terminate formatting and print

Sample 2:

L
rTEST
X
G

Begin label format
Retrieve format named test
Terminate formatting
Print

Sample 3:

L
D11
PO
SO
rTEST
E

Begin label format
Dot size = 1x1
Print speed 0
Slew speed 0
Retrieve format named test
Terminate formatting and print

S

Set Slew Speed
This command controls the rate at which the label is moved through non-printed areas. The setting
remains unchanged unless another slew speed command is received or until the printer is reset.
Syntax:

Sa

Where:

a

Sample:

L
SE
141100001000100LABEL1
E
L
1411000010001000LABEL2
E

- Is a single alpha character representing a speed; see Appendix
L for valid ranges.

The sample sets the slew speed to 3 inches per second (76 mmps), and prints two labels. The slew
speed for the second label is the same as the first.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

79

Label Formatting Command Functions

s

Store Label Format In Module
This command stores a label format to a specified module. Supplying the module name will store the
label to that module; otherwise, using C will cause the label format to be stored in the selected default
module (see X). In addition, this command terminates the Label Formatting Command.
Syntax:

sann…n

Where:

a

-

Is the module designator representing a single character
module name; see Appendix K.

nn…n

-

Represents the name of the label (maximum 16 characters).

Sample:

L
D11
191100501000000123456789012
1911005020000001234567
191100500000000Sample
1X1100000000000B250250002002
Q0001
sATEST

The example stores a format in memory module A and names it ‘TEST’. (To recall a label format
from the module use the ‘r’ command.)

T

Set Field Data Line Terminator
This command, intended for use with record types that accept binary data (e.g., PDF417), allows
special binary control codes (e.g., a carriage return) to be embedded in the printed data by setting an
alternate data line terminator. It remains valid only for the next format record, then the terminator
defaults back to the carriage return.
Syntax:

Tnn

Where:

nn

Sample:

L
T00
191100200000000TEST
141100001000100TERMIATOR
Q0001
E

-

Is an ASCII two-character representation of a HEX code to be
used for the end of data terminator.

The sample sets the printer to use a NULL terminator (ASCII NULL: HEX 00) for the data line
termination code. The terminator is immediately restored to a carriage return , as seen in the
format record containing the text ‘TERMINATOR’.

80

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Label Formatting Command Functions

U

Mark Previous Field as a String Replacement Field
This command controls the way replacement data is formatted. Specifying a field as a string
replacement for dynamic fields, and not for static fields, will optimize label throughput. See the
U command.
þ Note: The data string length of any replacement is set by the length of the original string; both must be
equal. The data being used when created must be valid for the font type being selected.

Syntax:

U

Sample:

L
D11
121100001000000123456789012
U
1211000020000001234567
U
161100000000000Sample
1X1100000000000B250250002002
Q0001
E
U01ABCDEFGHIJKL
U028901234
G

The sample sets up the label format for register loading and prints two labels. The first two of the four
format records have been designated as replacement fields. The second label is generated with
System-Level field-replacement commands and prints the last label.

X

Terminate Label Formatting Mode
This command causes the printer, when in label formatting mode, to immediately switch to the system
command mode and generate a label format based on the data received at that point. However, unlike
the ‘E’ command, it will not print a label. (Other termination commands are the ‘E’ and ‘s’.)
Syntax:

X

Sample:

L
141100001000100SAMPLE
X

The sample will result in a label format, but no label will be printed.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

81

Label Formatting Command Functions

y

Select Font Symbol Set
This command, like the y, selects the scalable font symbol set. The selected symbol set
remains active until another symbol set is selected; see the y command for details.
Syntax:

ySxx

Where:

S

-

Byte-size designation; see Appendix H:
S = Single byte symbol sets.
U = Double byte symbol sets.

xx

-

Symbol set selection.

Sample:

L
ySSW

The sample selects the Swedish symbol set for use in succeeding format records using scalable fonts.

z

Zero (Ø) Conversion to “0”
This command removes the slash zero in fonts 0 to 8, and in the human readable field (if any) of the
bar codes A to Z. The command applies only to format records containing those fonts and bar codes,
and is effective only for the label format in which it appears.
þ Note: None of the smooth fonts (i.e., Font 9) use the slash zero. This command will have no effect on
scalable fonts.

82

Syntax:

z

Sample:

L
z
121100000000000Test0000
E

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Label Formatting Command Functions

+ (>)

Make Last Field Entered Increment Numeric (Alphanumeric)

This command, useful in printing sequenced labels, causes the printer to automatically increment a
field on the labels in a batch. The numeric data in the field will increment by the value assigned after
the plus sign (+) each time a label is produced (or the greater than character [>] can be substituted to
make the field increment alphabetically). This command is effective only on the label format record
that it follows, and is intended to be used with the Q, E, or G commands.
Syntax:

*pii

Where:

*

-

Is + for numeric increment, or > for alphanumeric
increment.

p

-

Is the fill character for the left-hand character of the field.

ii

-

Is the amount by which to increment the field.

Sample:

L
13220000000000012345
+01
Q0003
E

The sample will generate a single field label format that prints the initial label with a value of 12345,
and then increments that number by one for the next two labels.

Embedding
Numeric strings for incrementing may also be embedded between alphabetic characters (e.g., when
systems require alphanumeric bar codes with alphabetic prefixes or suffixes).
Sample:

L
161100000100010AB0001CD
+ 100
Q0003
E

The sample will print three labels, incrementing 0001 by 1 on each label with AB and CD remaining
untouched: AB0001CD, AB0002CD, AB0003CD. Note that the increment value has one leading
blank and two trailing zeros, while the blank is a pad character and the trailing zeroes are
placeholders that leave CD unchanged.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

83

Label Formatting Command Functions

- (<)

Make Last Field Entered Decrement Numeric (Alphanumeric)

This command, useful in printing sequenced labels, causes the printer to automatically decrement a
field on the labels in a batch. The numeric data in the field will decrement by the value assigned after
the minus (-) sign each time a label is produced (or the less than character [<] can be substituted to
make the field decrement alphabetically). This command is effective only on the label format record
that it follows, and is intended to be used with the Q, E or G commands.
Syntax:

*pii

Where:

*

-

Is - for numeric decrement, or < for alphanumeric decrement.

p

-

Is the fill character for the leftmost character of the field.

ii

-

Is the amount by which to decrement the field.

Sample:

L
132200000000000123AB
<01
Q0003
E

The sample will generate a single field label format that prints the initial label with a value of 123AB,
and then decrements that number by one for the next two labels.

Embedding
Numeric strings for decrementing may also be embedded between alphabetic characters (e.g., when
systems require alphanumeric bar codes with alphabetic prefixes or suffixes).
Sample:

L
1611000001000101000CD
- 100
Q0003
E

The sample will print three labels: 1000CD, 999CD, and 998CD. Note that the pad character is a
placeholder for digits removed from the left side in the subtraction process. When a fixed pitch font
(where all characters have the same width) is used, the justification of the rightmost character is
sustained regardless of the number of digits replaced by the pad character on the left side.

84

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Label Formatting Command Functions

^

Set Count by Amount
This command allows applications using the increment / decrement field command to print more than
one label with the same field value before the field data is updated. All printers default to 1.
þ Note:

This command can only be issued once per label format. In addition, when alternate Control Codes
are enabled, the ^ character must be replaced by the @ character (hexadecimal 0x40). See
Control Codes.

Syntax:

^nn

Where:

^

- May be 0x55 or 0x40, see Control Codes.

nn

- Is a two-digit value that specifies the number of labels to be
generated before incrementing (or decrementing) the field value.

Sample:

L
13220000000000012345
-01
^02
Q0006
E

The sample prints two labels containing the same field value before decrementing the field. Six labels
are printed.

Special Label Formatting Command Functions
Two Special Label Formatting Commands, the S and the T, are entered directly into the
data field of label format records. Do not confuse them with System-Level Commands because the same
control character is used. If alternate control codes are enabled the  becomes ‘~’ (hexadecimal
0x7E); see Control Codes.
Label Formatting Character

Command Description

S

Recall global data and place in field

T

Print time and date

Table 6-2: Special Label Formatting Commands

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

85

Label Formatting Command Functions

STX S

Recall Global Data And Place In Field

This command, when in the format record data field, places data from a specified global register into
the data field. See the G command.
Syntax:

Sn

Where:

n

Sample:

L
121100000000000DMX
G
1A2210001000000SA
E

-

Specifies the global register (A − P) that contains the data to
place into the data field.

The sample places the string “DMX” into the next available global register (A), and then line 4 is
effectively replaced by the data from global register A.

STX T

Print Time and Date

This command, using string characters and markers, allows time and date data to be selected and
retrieved from the printer’s internal clock. In addition, the T may be preceded by data to be
printed/encoded, and/or the string may now be terminated by an  command and then followed
by more data terminated by a . The string characters/markers are not printed; instead, the
printed label will show a corresponding print value.
þ Note:

When using substitution you must ensure the converted string produces valid characters for the
selected bar code / font.

Syntax:

Tstring

Where:

string -

String
Characters
A
BCD
EF
GH...O
PQ
RSTU

Is any set of characters, A - Z and a – h. See the table below.

Print
Values
Day of the week (Mon = 1, Sun = 7)
Day of the week name
Month number
Month name
Day
Year

String
Markers
VW
XY
Za
gh
bc
def

Print
Values
Hour in 24 hour format
Hour in 12 hour format
Minutes
Seconds
AM or PM
Julian date

Table 6-3: Time and Date String Characters
þ Note:

86

The sample listings below assume a current printer date of December 21, 1998.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Label Formatting Command Functions

Sample 1:

L
121100001000100TBCD GHI PQ, TU
E

Sample 1 will print SUN DEC 21, 98 on a label.

Sample 2:

L
191100100100010TEF/PQ
E

Sample 2 will print 12/21 on a label.

Sample 3:

L
191100100100010ABC TEF/PQ DEF
E

Sample 3 will print ABC 12/21 DEF on a label. (This illustrates a method of embedding the time
string. The string must be terminated by an .)

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

87

Label Formatting Command Functions

88

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Font Loading Command Functions

Introduction
The commands used for font loading are usually generated by font creation software; however, the
assigned font ID number command must be sent to the printer before the font file. All Font Loading
Commands begin with  (ASCII control character 27 [decimal]).
The downloaded font will be stored in the default module (refer to the X command). The
commands in the table below are listed in their order of appearance, top to bottom, during font
downloading. The D command must be sent prior to downloading a font.
Command
*c###D
)s#Wnn...n
*c#E
(s#W

Description
Assign Font ID Number
Font Descriptor
Character Code
Character Download Data

Table 7-1: Font Loading Commands

*c###D

Assign Font ID Number

This command is the first command required for downloading a font to either RAM or Flash Memory
modules. ESC represents the ASCII control character 27.
Syntax:

*c###D

Where:

###

)s###W

-

Is the font ID numbers 100-999 (000 – 099 are reserved for
resident fonts).

Font Descriptor

This command (typically first data in a font file) contains all of the information about the font
contained in the file. Different font generation software will create different length header
information, but the initial 64 bytes will remain consistent with the PCL-4 (HP LaserJet II) format.
Syntax:

)s###Wddd...d

Where:

###

-

dd...d -

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Is the number of bytes of font descriptor data from 1 to 3
ASCII decimal digits.
Is the descriptor.

89

Font Loading Commands

*c###E

Character Code

This code is the ASCII decimal value corresponding to the next downloaded character.
Syntax:

*c###E

Where:

###

-

Is the ASCII value of the character, three digits maximum, 0
to 999.

(s#W Character Download Data
This command contains all of the information for one downloaded character.
Syntax:

(s###Wnn…n

Where:

###

- Is the number of bytes of bit-mapped data, three digits
maximum, from 1 to 999.

nn...n - Is the bit-mapped data.

90

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Generating Label Formats

Introduction
This section explains the use of the different fields in a print format record.

Format Record Commands
Table 8-1 is an example of a label format as seen by the printer, while Figure 8-1 is the label generated by
this format. The printer receives the data sequentially, left to right, top to bottom.
String Sent to Printer
L

D11
121100000050005Home Position
191100602000200ROTATION 1
291100602000200ROTATION 2
391100602000200ROTATION 3
491100602000200ROTATION 4
1A3104003000260123456
4a6210002500140123456
1X1100000000000B400400003003
1X1100002000000L400001
1X1100000000200L001400
121100004100010Printhead Location
Q0001
E
Table 8-1: Sample Label Format

Printer Interpretation
Begin label format
Set dot size
Format text
Format text
Format text
Format text
Format text
Format bar code with text
Format bar code
Format box
Format line
Format line
Format text
Number of labels
End formatting, begin print

þ Note: This example assumes that the printer is in ‘inch’ mode (n).
Printhead Location

Media
Movement

Home Position

Figure 8-1: Formatted Sample Label

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

91

Generating Label Formats

The first line in the sample format (Table 8-1) is the System-Level Command directing the printer to begin
label formatting. (Other System-Level Commands may precede the L for printer setup.) Lines 2, 14,
and 15 are Label Formatting Commands. Line 15 is the exit and print command. The remaining lines (313) are print format records, explained in this chapter.
A record is a data string that contains the information to be printed on the label(s). Records are the building
blocks of label formats. Every record must end with a termination character (usually a carriage return,
). Omitting termination characters will result in the concatenation of records. Omitting the carriage
return that precedes the termination character E, which is necessary to complete the label formatting and
begin printing, will cause the printer to continue interpreting all subsequent data as label print format
records.

Generating Records
Every record is made of three parts: (1) a header that is 15 bytes in length, (2) the data to be printed,
and (3) a termination character (e.g., ) marking the end of the field. The header is used to select
the appearance of the data when printed by choosing rotation, font type, size, and position options.
Every header contains similar information, but this information may be used in different ways by
different types of records. The six record types are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Internal Bit-Mapped Font
Smooth Font (Simulated)
Scalable Font
Bar code
Images
Graphics

The Structure of a Record
The basic structure of the record is described below. For details regarding the various interpretations of
the six types see Record Structure Types.
The third line of the label format example in Table 8-1 consists of the following:
121100000050005HOME POSITION
This string comprises a complete record, shown below, divided into its three basic component parts.
Header
121100000050005

Data String
HOME POSITION

Termination Character


Table 8-2: Record Structure Components
The record conforms to the following fixed field format (spaces added for readability). Identifying
lower case letters have been placed below field values for reference in the following sections:
1 2 1 1
a b c d

92

000
eee

0005
ffff

0005
gggg

HOME POSITION
[hhhh iiii] jj…j


Termination character

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Generating Label Formats

Location
Within
Record
a
b
c
d
eee
ffff
gggg
hhhh
iiii
jj...j

Record Type
Internal BitMapped Font
Rotation
Font ID
Width
Multiplier
Height
Multiplier
000
Row
Position
Column
Position
N/A
N/A
Data
String

Smooth
Font
Rotation
9
Width
Multiplier
Height
Multiplier
Font Size/
ID
Row
Position
Column
Position
N/A
N/A
Data
String

Scalable
Font
Rotation
9
Width
Multiplier
Height
Multiplier
ID
Row
Position
Column
Position
Font Height
Font Width
Data
String

Bar
Code
Rotation
Bar Code
Wide
Bar
Narrow
Bar
Bar Code
Height
Row
Position
Column
Position
N/A
N/A
Data
String

Images

Graphics

Rotation
Y
Width
Multiplier
Height
Multiplier
000

1
X
1

Row
Position
Column
Position
N/A
N/A
Image
Name

1
000
Row Position
Column
Position
N/A
N/A
Graphic
Specifiers

Table 8-3: Record Type Structure

In Table 8-3, the record structure is shown for each of the record types. The left-most column shows
the locations of all characters in the record, and corresponds to the example above the table. Each
record structure interprets the characters of the record in its own way, though some of the
interpretations of the characters are identical across all record types. For example, the characters ffff
are interpreted as Row Position in all record types. While c is a Width Multiplier for Internal BitMapped Font, Smooth Font, Scalable Font, and Image record types, it has other interpretations for Bar
Code and Graphics record types.

The Header Fields
Each of the fields in the record header is generally described below. Please reference the detailed
descriptions under Record Structure Types for variations. The field name titles of the following
paragraphs are preceded with a reference letter from Table 8-3. All characters sent to the printer within
the header fields are ASCII, alphanumeric.

a:

Rotation

The first field of a header is a single ASCII character that selects the degree of rotation for the data
to be printed on a label. Valid rotation values are 1 (0º); 2 (90º); 3 (180º); and 4 (270º) clockwise.
Figure 8-1 shows the direction and amount of rotation clockwise, relative to the label feed
direction. The bottom left corner of the object is the pivot point.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

93

Generating Label Formats

Fonts, Bar Codes, Graphics and Images

b:

The second field (b) determines how the rest of the fields are interpreted, as shown in the table
below. Values 0 through 9 select human-readable fonts. 0 through 8 will select standard Datamax
fonts; value 9 selects the CG Triumvirate smooth scalable font (internal) or scalable fonts. When 9
is used to select a scalable font, the font size (font I.D. number) is chosen by entering a value in the
height field eee.
Values A through z select bar codes. Values A through T (uppercase) will print bar codes with
human-readable interpretations. Values a through z (lowercase), will print bar codes only.
Value W requires two additional characters to specify the Bar Code/Font ID.
A font field value X selects a drawing object (line, box, circle or polygon), and field value Y is
used to print an image stored in a module.
Font Field Value (b)

0-9
A-T
a-z
Wxx
X
Y

Interpretation
Font
Bar code with human readable text.
Bar code without human readable text.
Bar code/Font expansion
Line, box, polygon, circle
Image
Table 8-4: Font Field Interpretations

c:

Width Multiplier

Values 1-9 and A-O represent multiplication factors (base 25 numbers). For human-readable fonts,
the width multiplier represents the number of times the selected font dot tables are multiplied and
has no effect on the character height. For bar codes, this character specifies the wide bar width or
ratio. Values 1 through 9 and A through O will give a wide bar width of from 0.0033” (0.085 mm)
to 0.792” (2.011 mm) at a resolution dependent upon the printer model. See Appendix F for default
values.

d:

Height Multiplier

The height multiplier has the same range and function as the width multiplier, but vertical. When
used in the context of bar codes, this field is the ratio denominator, or the small bar (module)
width. Values 1 through 9 and A through O will give a narrow bar width of one dot (dot size =
1/printhead resolution) to 24 dots. The narrow bar width resolution and range are dependent upon
the printhead resolution, see Appendix K. A “dot multiplier” command can also be used to change
the printed dot size (see Label Formatting Command ‘D’ and Appendix F).

94

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Generating Label Formats

Bar Code Height (Font Size/Selection)

eee:

This field has interpretations dependent upon the value of the font b field, as shown below.
b
Font Field Value

eee
Field Range
000
000-999, A04-A72, S00-S9z,
U00-U9z, u00-u9z
000-999
000-999
000-999
000

0-8
9
A-T
a-z
Wxx
X,Y

eee
Field Interpretation
Not used –Internal bitmapped font
Font height; Font selection
Bar code height (with human readable)
Bar code height
Bar code height (with human readable)
Not used

Table 8-5: Bar Code Height Field Interpretations

ffff:

Row Position

The lower left corner of a label is considered the “home position” (see Figure 8-1). The row
position field is a vertical coordinate that determines how far above the home position the data is to
be printed. Field data is interpreted in hundredths of an inch or tenths of millimeters.

gggg:

Column Position

This field is a horizontal coordinate that determines how far to the right of “home position” the
data will be printed. Appendix G lists the maximum values of the gggg field.

hhhh:

Optional Scalable Font Height

The height of a scalable font can be specified in two ways: points or dots. To specify the height in
points the first character of the field is a ‘P’ followed by the number of points, 004 to 999. To
specify the size in dots, all four characters must be numeric. This field must be specified for
scalable fonts. (See note below Optional Scalable Font Width.)

iiii:

Optional Scalable Font Width

The width of a scalable font can be specified in two ways, points or dots. To specify the width in
points, the first character of the field is a ‘P’ followed by the number of points, 004 to 999 points.
To specify the size in dots, all four characters must be numeric. This field must be specified for
scalable fonts. See note below.
þ Note: To ensure that the data stream is portable to different Datamax printers, specify the font size in
points. If the font is specified in dots, it will output differently on printers with different DPI/MMPI
resolutions. There are 72.307 points per 1 inch (2.847 mm).

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

95

Generating Label Formats

Data Field

jj…j:

The final field contains the data that will actually be printed on the label. A string of data can be up
to 255 characters in length, (except when using the PDF417 bar code, which may be up to 3000
characters long) ending with a carriage return. Characters placed in the data field will be printed as
long as they fall within the physical range of the printhead. Consult Appendix K for a listing by
printer.

Record Structure Types
Each of the six record types has its own field structure and is described in the following section. The
record types allow quick reference to the field types and their valid data inputs for the field. There are
similar, but unique, record structures for each: internal, bit-mapped fonts, internal smooth fonts,
downloaded bit-mapped fonts, scalable fonts, bar codes, images, and graphics. The field location
identifiers in the tables that follow are the same as those in Table 8-3.

1.

Internal Bit-Mapped Fonts

This record type is used for internal bitmapped fonts (see Appendix C, Tables C-1 – C-5).
When a 0 through 8 is entered in field b, then the height field eee is not used. The bitmapped
fonts include 8 different fonts (see Appendix C). The character mapping for these fonts is shown
in Appendix A, or a subset thereof.
Field
a
b
c
d
eee
ffff
gggg
jj…j

Valid Inputs

Meaning

1, 2, 3 and 4
0 to 8 (see Appendix C).
1 to 9 and A to O
1 to 9 and A to O
000
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999 Dependent upon printer. See Appendix K.
Valid ASCII character string up to 255 characters, followed
by a termination character.

Rotation
Font
Width Multiplier
Height Multiplier
N/A
Row
Column

Data

Table 8-6: Internal Bit-mapped Font Record Structure

2.

Smooth Font, Font Modules, and Downloaded Bit-Mapped Fonts

This record type is used for internal smooth fonts (CG Triumvirate – see Table C-6) or a bitmapped font downloaded to a memory module (see Font Loading Commands).
When a 9 is entered in field b, then the height field eee determines the font. The internal smooth
font has up to 13 font sizes (see Appendix C). Values 100 through 999 select individual fonts
stored on DRAM, or Flash memory. These include downloaded bit-mapped fonts (see Table 8-5).
Use eee values of 096 – 099 for Kanji fonts, if equipped (see Appendix I). The character mapping
for these fonts is shown in Appendix A or a subset thereof.

96

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Generating Label Formats

Field
a
b
c
d
eee
ffff
gggg
jj…j

Valid Inputs
1, 2, 3 and 4
9
1 to 9 and A to O
1 to 9 and A to O
000 to 999 (000 to 099 Reserved), A04 to A72, x04 – x72*
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999 Dependent upon printer. See Appendix K.
Valid ASCII character string up to 255 characters followed
by a termination character.

Meaning
Rotation
Fixed Value
Width Multiplier
Height Multiplier
Font/size
Row
Column
Data

* Where x is an upper case letter, see Appendix H.

Table 8-7: Smooth Font Record Structure

3.

Scalable Fonts

The Smooth Scalable Font Technology has been licensed from AGFA. Both Intellifont (.CDI) and
TrueType (.TTF) Scalable Font file formats are supported. The eee field identifies the scalable
font, and data type – normal (binary) or Hex ASCII. Uppercase S or U – binary, lowercase u – Hex
ASCII. See Appendix H for additional information. Values S00 to S9z, and U00 to U9z (u00 to
u9z), select a scalable font, either internal or downloaded.
S00 and S01 are used for the standard internal (resident) fonts on display-equipped printers, while
S01 is used for the standard internal (resident) font on non-display models.
Field
a
b
c
d
eee
ffff
gggg
hhhh

Valid Inputs
1, 2, 3 and 4
9
1 to 9 and A to O
1 to 9 and A to O
S00 to Szz, U00-Uzz, u00-uzz
0000 to 9999
Dependent upon printer. See Appendix K.
P004-P999, 0016-4163*

iiii

P004-P999, 0014-4163*

jj…j

Valid ASCII character string up to 255 characters followed by
a termination character.

Meaning
Rotation
Fixed Value
Width Multiplier
Height Multiplier
Font data type
Row
Column
Character height;
points, dots
Character width;
points, dots
Data

* Character size specifications are printhead resolution dependent as indicated in the following table.

Table 8-8: Scalable Font Record Structure

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

97

Generating Label Formats

Printhead
Resolution (DPI)
203
300
400
600

Character size (dots)
Width
16-2817
14-4163
22-5550
33-8325

Height
16-2817
16-4163
22-5550
33-8325

Table 8-9: Scalable Character Size Ranges
þ Note:

4.

A scalable font cache must be allocated to print. Minimum cache size is 15. The double byte
fonts require five units of additional cache.

Bar Codes

Valid inputs for the bar code field b are letters: uppercase letters will print a human-readable text
below the bar code; lowercase letters will only print the bar code. For example, entering a ‘p’ in the
b field selects the Postnet bar code. Because the Postnet font does not provide human-readable
data, the uppercase P is not valid. Other bar codes without a human-readable counterpart include u
(MaxiCode) and z (PDF417) – for additional model-specific restrictions see Appendix F.
For module-based bar codes, field d is the narrow bar width in dots (bar code module size). For
consistent results in all rotations for bar codes of this type, field d and field c must have the same
value. For ratio-based bar codes field c is the wide bar width in dots (the numerator); field d is the
narrow bar width in dots (the denominator). See Appendix G for specific bar code information and
variations in record format field usage.
The eee height field represents the bar code (symbol) height. The eee height field represents the
bar code height. The valid range (001 to 999) translates to bar heights ranging from .01 inch (.254
mm) to 9.99 inches (253.7 mm). For bar codes that require additional specified parameters, use the
jj…j data field as the location for these parameters. See the specific bar code for details in
Appendix G.
Field
Valid Inputs
a
1, 2, 3 and 4
b [bb] A to Z and a to z (except P, u, v, z), or Wna where n is 1 to 9 and
a is A to S and a to s. No n is an implied 1.
c
1 to 9 and A to O
d
1 to 9 and A to O
eee
001 to 999
ffff
0000 to 9999
gggg
See Appendix K.
jj…j
Valid ASCII character string up to 255 characters followed by a
termination character.

Meaning
Rotation
Bar
Code
Wide Bar
Narrow Bar
Symbol height
Row
Column
Data

Table 8-10: Bar Code Record Structure
Placing a 0 (zero) in both c and d will cause the printer to use the default bar code ratio or module
size. Placing a 000 (zero) in the symbol height field causes the printer to use the default bar code
height.

98

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Generating Label Formats

5.

Images

An image record is used to print an image that is stored in a memory module. Images can be
printed only in Rotation 1 (see Input Image Data I).
Field
a
b
c
d
eee
ffff
gggg
jj…j

Valid Inputs

1
Y
1 to 9 and A to O
1 to 9 and A to O
000
0000 to 9999
See Appendix K.
ASCII string, up
character.

Meaning
Fixed Value
Image
Width Multiplier
Height Multiplier
Fixed Value
Row
Column
to 16 characters followed by a termination Image name
Table 8-11: Image Fields

6.

Graphics

Using graphics, the printer can produce lines, boxes, polygons, and circles. This function is selected
by entering an X in field b. The values entered in the data field determine the sizes and shapes of
the objects to be drawn. Forms can be created using shaded boxes, complex logos, or even a simple
diagonal line without the need to download a graphics file to the printer. The following subsections describe how to generate each kind of graphic.

Lines and Boxes
Lines and boxes are drawn by values that determine column and row starting position, length,
width, and wall thickness of the line or box (see Appendix K). Depending on the printer’s mode, all
measurements are interpreted as inches/100 or millimeters/10 (see m). The data field jj…j
is used to describe the line or box dimensions.
Segment
a
b
c
d
eee
ffff
gggg
jj..j

Valid Inputs
1
X
1
1
000
0000 to 9999
0000-9999, see Appendix K.
Lhhhvvv
- Line Drawing
lhhhhvvvv
- Line Drawing
Bhhhvvvbbbsss
- Box Drawing
bhhhhvvvvbbbbssss - Box Drawing

Meaning
Fixed value
Line / Box
Fixed Value
Fixed Value
Fixed Value
Row
Column
*Line
**Line
***Box
****Box

Table 8-12: Line and Box Parameters

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

99

Generating Label Formats

*LINE:

Lhhhvvv

Where:

L
=
hhh =
vvv =

**LINE:

lhhhhvvvv

Where:

l
=
hhhh =
vvvv =

***BOX:

Bhhhvvvbbbsss

Where:

B
hhh
vvv
bbb
sss

****BOX:

bhhhhvvvvbbbbssss

Where:

b
=
hhhh =
vvvv =
bbbb =
ssss =

þ Note:

=
=
=
=
=

“L” and specifies line drawing,
horizontal width of line,
vertical height of line.

“l” and specifies line drawing,
horizontal width of line,
vertical height of line.

“B” and specifies box drawing,
horizontal width of box,
vertical height of box,
thickness of bottom and top,
thickness of sides.

“b” specifies box drawing,
horizontal width of box,
vertical height of box,
thickness of bottom and top box edges,
thickness of sides of box.

Lines are sometimes better understood as filled-in boxes, while boxes are hollow.

Polygons
Polygons are created by defining the positions of the corners, specifying a number of data points
that represent the vertices of the object, which can range from a simple line (two points), or a
triangle (three points), to any free-form outline. Polygons may be filled with a variety of
different patterns. All row/column specifiers are interpreted as inches/100 or millimeters/10
depending on the printer mode, (see m).
Record structure for a polygon (spaces added for readability):
1 X 11 ppp rrrr cccc P ppp bbbb rrrr cccc rrrr cccc ... 
Where:
1
X
1
1
ppp
rrrr
cccc
P
þ Note:

100

001
Rotation (must be 1)
Fixed Value
0001
Graphic field ID
Fixed Value
rrrr
Multiplier (must be 1)
Row of point 2
cccc
Multiplier (must be 1)
Column of point 2
rrrr
Fill pattern #
Row of point 3
cccc
Row of point 1
Column of point 3
...... Additional points
Column of point 1

Polygon ID (Fixed Value)
Termination character
Table 8-13: Polygon Record Structure
The points must be specified in the order to be drawn; the last point specified is automatically
connected to the first point to close the polygon. If only two points are specified, a single line
will be drawn. See Label Formatting Command A.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Generating Label Formats

Circles
A circle is created by defining by its center point and radius. Circles can be filled with a variety of
different patterns. Row, column, and radius are interpreted as inches (100) or millimeters (10)
depending on printer mode.
Record structure for a circle (spaces have been added for readability):
1 X 11 fff rrrr cccc C ppp bbbb rrrr 
Where:
1
X
1
1
fff
rrrr

cccc Column of the center point
Rotation (must be 1)
C
Graphic field
Circle ID (Fixed Value)
001
Multiplier (must be 1)
Fixed Value
0001 Fixed Value
Multiplier (must be 1)
rrrr Radius of the circle
Fill pattern #
 Termination character
Row of the center point
Table 8-14: Circle Record Structure

Fill Patterns for Polygons and Circles:
0

no pattern

1

solid black

2

6% black

3

12% black

4

25% black

5

38% black

6

50% black

7

little diamonds

8

little circles

9

right diagonal lines

10

left diagonal lines

11

small grid

Figure 8-2: Fill Patterns

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

101

Generating Label Formats

Examples (Spaces have been added for readability):

1.

Triangle

The record:
1 X 11 000 0010 0010 P 001 0001 0040 0025 0010 0040
Produces a triangle with no fill pattern:
(row 0040, column 0025)

(row 0010, column 0010)
2.

(row 0010, column 0040)

Rectangle with Fill

The record:
1 X 11 004 0010 0010 P 001 0001 0050 0010 0050 0200 0010 0200
Produces a rectangle filled with pattern 4 (25% black):

(row 0010, column 0010)

3.

(row 0050, column 0200)

Circle

The record:
1 X 11 000 0100 0100 C 001 0001 0025
Produces a circle centered at row 0100, column 0100 with a radius of 0025 and no fill pattern:

4.

Circle with Fill

The record:
1 X 11 009 0100 0100 C 001 0001 0025 
Produces a circle centered at row 0100, column 0100 with a radius of 0025 and filled with pattern
9 (right diagonal lines):

102

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Generating Label Formats

Advanced Format Attributes
Two different advanced formatting attributes extend the text presentation capabilities. The first format
attribute allows a set of label format records to make a state change that modifies the font attributes of
any following DPL text records. The second format attribute provides a means of inserting text and
font formatting commands directly into the DPL data stream via a command delimiter structure. All
label formats begin by default with attributes disabled.
þ Note:

These commands are only valid for “scalable” fonts, such as Internal Font 9, S00 and S01 or
downloaded TrueType scalable fonts. (Non-display models have limited standard font sets and
capabilities; see the notes below for applicability of commands and consult the appropriate operators
manual for available standard and optional font sets.)

The table below represents the current list of font attributes available to the user. Note that these
commands are delimited by the \ sequence (where xxx is from the list below).
Command
FB
FI
FU

Units
+/+/+/-

FPn

Points

Purpose
Turns on or off emboldment of the font
Turns on or off italicize of the font
Turns on or off underlining of string.

Specify the vertical point size of the
following text relative to the base line.
FSn
Points Specify the horizontal point size of the
following text relative to the base line.
FR[+/-]n Degrees Specify the rotation of the base line,
relative to the original print direction of
the record.

Notes
minus ‘-’ disable, plus ‘+’ enable
minus ‘-’ disable, plus ‘+’ enable
minus ‘-’ disable, plus ‘+’ enable
(display-equipped models only)
Display-equipped models only
Display-equipped models only
If a + or – precedes the numeric
value, then the direction is relative
to the current print direction.

Table 8-15: Advanced Format Attributes
For example, the first format attribute command can be illustrated as follows. The text below and the
resulting label (Figure 1) are examples of a current DPL format:
L
D11
1911S0102600040P018P018Old
1911S0102000040P018P018Old
1911S0101400040P018P018Old
1911S0100800040P018P018Old
1911S0100200040P018P018Old
E

DPL
DPL
DPL
DPL
DPL

World
World
World
World
World

Figure 1
Now, if the DPL format is modified as follows, the resulting label (Figure 2) is printed:

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

103

Generating Label Formats

L
D11
FA+
FB+
1911S0102600040P018P018New
FU+I+
1911S0102000040P018P018New
FI-U+B1911S0101400040P018P018New
FU-B+
1911S0100800040P018P018New
FB+I+U+
1911S0100200040P018P018New
FB-U-IE

DPL World
DPL World
DPL World
DPL World
DPL World

Figure 2
Note that if all format commands after the first FB+ were deleted the entire label would have been
printed with bold scalable fonts. This is what is meant by a state change. Once invoked, that command
is in affect until turned off or the label format is terminated with the “E” “s” or the “X” command.
The second format attribute command is inserted into the text data stream and delimited by the angle
brackets “<>“ This structure takes the form of \. An example of this command is as
follows:
L
D11
A2
FA+
1911S0105000020P018P018DPL allows \FONT\ sizes
\in the string
1911S0103500100P018P018\D\P\L\ \l\e\t\s\ \y\o\u\ \w\r\i\t\e\ \i\n\
\c\i\r\c\l\e\s\ \t\o\o\!
1911S0102400040P018P018\DPL allows \Rotations\
in the string
1911S0102000040P018P018DPL allows \BOLD\ in the string
FU+
1911S0101400040P018P012DPL allows \ITALICS\ in the string
FI+U1911S0101000040P018P012DPL allows \COMBINATIONS\ in
the string
FB+I1911S0100600040P018P018DPL allows \BOLD\ in the string
FU+I+
1911S0100200040P018P018DPL allows \BOLD\ in the string
FB-U-IE

104

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Generating Label Formats

Figure 3 is an example of the output from this DPL command
stream. The user has the ability to change the point and set size of
the font within the DPL command record. In addition, the angle of
the baseline may be specified relative to the current orientation of
the record. (For example, the command \ will rotate the
baseline forty five degrees in the positive direction from the
default print direction.)

Figure 3
þ Note:

Refer to back to Section 8 for more information regarding the DPL record format for a scalable font
text string.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

105

Generating Label Formats

106

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix

ASCII Control Chart
Ctrl @
Ctrl A
Ctrl B
Ctrl C
Ctrl D
Ctrl E
Ctrl F
Ctrl G
Ctrl H
Ctrl I
Ctrl J
Ctrl K
Ctrl L
Ctrl M
Ctrl N
Ctrl O
Ctrl P
Ctrl Q
Ctrl R
Ctrl S
Ctrl T
Ctrl U
Ctrl V
Ctrl W
Ctrl X
Ctrl Y
Ctrl Z
Ctrl [
Ctrl \
Ctrl ]
Ctrl ^
Ctrl _

Char
NUL
SOH
STX
EXT
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US

Dec
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

Hex
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Char
!
“
#
$
%
&
Ô
(
)
*
+
,
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?

Dec
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63

Hex
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F

Char
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_

Dec
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95

Hex
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F

Char
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~

Dec
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127

Hex
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F

107

Appendix A

ASCII Control Chart (continued)
Char
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
î
ì
Ä
Å
É
æ
Æ
ô
ö
ò
û
ù
ÿ
Ö
Ü
ø
£
Ø
x
ƒ

Dec
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159

þ Notes: (1)

(2)

108

Hex
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
8F
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
9A
9B
9C
9D
9E
9F

Char
á
í
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
°
¿
®
1/2
1/4
¡
¯

²
³
´
Á
Â
À
©
¹
»
¢
¥

Dec
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191

Hex
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BA
BB
BC
BD
BE
BF

Char

ã
Ã

ð
Ð
Ê
Ë
È
Í
Î
Ï

Ì

Dec
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223

Hex
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
CA
CB
CC
CD
CE
CF
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
DA
DB
DC
DD
DE
DF

Char
Ó
ß
Ô
Ò
õ
Õ
µ
þ
Þ
Ú
Û
Ù
ý
Ý

±
3/4

÷
¸
º
¨
·

Dec
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255

Hex
E0
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
EA
EB
EC
ED
EE
EF
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF

For hardware handshake XON/XOFF commands:
XON = Ctrl Q (DC1)
XOFF = Ctrl S (DC3)
The Euro currency character ( ) has been added to the table above at 255 (FF) as a
Datamax standard for resident bit-mapped fonts 0,1,2,3,4,5,6, and 9 (CG Triumvirate).

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix

Sample Programs
‘C’ Language Program
The following sample ‘C’ program is included for reference. Figure B-1 shows the output generated
by this program.
/« DMX SERIES Sample C program «/
# include 
main ()
{
char «pcs = “590”;
char «desc = “10K OHM 1/4 WATT”;
fputs (“DMX Printer Test Program\n”, stdout);
fputs (“\x02L\n”, stdaux);
fputs (“H07\n” stdaux);
fputs (“D11\n”, stdaux);

/« STX L – Enter Label Formatting «/
/« Enter Heat Setting of 7«/
/« Set Width and Height Dot Size «/

fprintf (stdaux, “191108010000025%s\n”,desc);

/« Select smooth Font «/

fprintf (stdaux, “1a6210000000050%sPCS\n”, pcs); /« Select Bar code type ‘a’ «/
fputs (“E\n”, stdaux);
/« End Label format mode and print«/
}

10K OHM 1/4 WATT

Figure B-1: Sample Label

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

109

Appendix B – Sample Programs

ASCII text file
The following ASCII text file will also generate the label shown in Figure B-1.
^BL
H07
D11
19110080100002510K OHM 1/4 WATT
1a6210000000050590PCS
E

VB Application Generating DPL
The following sample is a Visual Basic program that displays a database record on the screen. A user
can scroll through the records and then print a selected one. Five bar codes are printed along with data
fields and headings.
‘Printer DPL Controls
Dim CharSet As String
Const StartLabel = “L”
Const EndLabel = “E”
Const PrintDensity = “D11”

‘ byte

‘Printer DPL Data to position dynamic information on label
Const OrderTxt = “191100704150010”
‘font 9, 24 pt
Const OrderBC = “1a6205004200120”
Const CustomerTxt = “191100603600010”
Const
Const
Const
Const

Item1NO = “191100403250010”
Item1BC = “1a6204002870010”
Item1Txt = “191100402690010”
Item1Qty = “191100603070260”

‘DPL Fixed Items on label
Const Itm1 = “191100303400010Item #”
Const Qty1 = “191100303400250Quantity”
Const Boxsize = “B065035002002”
Const BoxPos1 = “1X1100003050240”
Const Image1 = “1Y3300004750010SLANT1”
Dim Fixed As String
‘Item Variables
Dim Item1 As String
Dim PrintLabel As String
Dim OrderData As String
‘Print label by clicking print button with the mouse
Private Sub cmdPrint_Click()

110

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix B – Sample Programs

‘Concatenate all the dynamic data fields with the constant
header strings, terminated with  Chr$(13)
OrderData = OrderTxt & txtOrderNo.Text & Chr$(13) &
OrderBC & txtOrderNo.Text & Chr$(13) & CustomerTxt &
txtCustomer.Text
Item1 = Item1NO & txtItem1.Text & Chr$(13) & Item1BC &
txtItem1.Text & Chr$(13) & Item1Txt & txtItem1Desc.Text &
Chr$(13) & Item1Qty & txtItem1Qty.Text
‘Concatinate entire label format and send out serial port
PrintLabel = CharSet & MaxLength & Chr$(13) & CharSet &
StartLabel & Chr$(13) & PrintDensity & Chr$(13) & Image1 &
Chr$(13) & OrderData & Chr$(13) & Item1 & Chr$(13) & Fixed &
Chr$(13) & EndLabel
Comm1.Output = PrintLabel End Sub
‘Display the record form on the screen
Private Sub Form_Load()
Fixed = Itm1 & Chr$(13) & Chr$(13) & Qty1 & Chr$(13) &
Chr$(13) & BoxPos1 & Boxsize & Chr$(13)
CharSet = Chr$(126)
‘Alternate  character ~
MComm.PortOpen = 1 ‘Open the serial port
End Sub
‘Exit the program by clicking Exit button with the mouse
Private Sub cmdExit_Click()
Comm1.PortOpen = 0 ‘Close down the serial port
End
End Sub

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

111

Appendix B – Sample Programs

VB Application interfacing via Windows Driver
Create a form similar to the one shown here.

VERSION 5.00
Begin VB.Form Form1
Caption
=
“Datamax Test Print”
ClientHeight
=
1065
ClientLeft
=
60
ClientTop
=
345
ClientWidth
=
2325
LinkTopic
=
“Form1”
MaxButton
=
0
‘False
MinButton
=
0
‘False
ScaleHeight
=
1065
ScaleWidth
=
2325
StartUpPosition =
3 ‘Windows Default
Begin VB.ComboBox cmboFonts
Height
=
315
Left
=
90
TabIndex
=
2
Text
=
“Font List”
Top
=
45
Width
=
2130
End
Begin VB.CommandButton cmdExit
Caption
=
“Quit”
Height
=
465
Left
=
1350
TabIndex
=
1
Top
=
495
Width
=
825
End
Begin VB.CommandButton cmdPrint
Caption
=
“Print”
Height
=
465
Left
=
90
TabIndex
=
0
Top
=
495
Width
=
870
End
End
Attribute VB_Name = “Form1”
Attribute VB_GlobalNameSpace = False
Attribute VB_Creatable = False
Attribute VB_PredeclaredId = True
Attribute VB_Exposed = False

112

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix B – Sample Programs

‘Print label by clicking print button with the mouse
Private Sub cmdPrint_Click()
‘font name as seen in application font list box
‘if not found, driver will inform GDI to generate an
‘image that will be downloaded
Printer.FontName = cmboFonts.Text
‘1,440 twips equals one inch
Printer.Height = 6480
‘4.5 inches in twips
Printer.Width = 5760
‘4 inches in twips
Printer.CurrentX = 1440
‘1 inch (column position)
Printer.CurrentY = 2160
‘2 inches (row position)
Printer.Print “0123456789”
Printer.EndDoc
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
Dim X As Printer
Dim I As Integer ‘Used for the font list
‘ search for printer queue name / driver name
For Each X In Printers
If X.DeviceName = “Datamax I-4206” Then ‘printer found
‘ Set printer as system default.
Set Printer = X
For I = 0 To Printer.FontCount - 1 ‘ Determine number of fonts.
cmboFonts.AddItem Printer.Fonts(I)
‘ Put each font into
list box.
Next I
Exit For
End If
Next
End Sub
‘Exit the program and shut down the serial port
‘by clicking Exit button with the mouse
Private Sub cmdExit_Click()
End
End Sub
When the program is run, the combo box should be populated with the available fonts as shown below.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

113

Appendix B – Sample Programs

VB Application to Send RAW Data via a Windows Printer Driver
This is a sample Visual Basic program that checks for any printer driver attached to “LPT1”. If one is
installed then a DPL file can be printed via the print driver. **Note that this does not have to be a
Datamax DPL print driver. DPL is created by the application and sent to LPT1.
To begin, a global variable called SelPrinter must be defined as a string. Then use the following code
to create a .frm file.
VERSION 5.00
Object = “{F9043C88-F6F2-101A-A3C9-08002B2F49FB}#1.2#0”;
“comdlg32.ocx”
Begin VB.Form Form1
Caption
=
“Form1”
ClientHeight
=
1290
ClientLeft
=
165
ClientTop
=
735
ClientWidth
=
3750
LinkTopic
=
“Form1”
MaxButton
=
0
‘False
MinButton
=
0
‘False
ScaleHeight
=
1290
ScaleWidth
=
3750
StartUpPosition =
3 ‘Windows Default
Begin MSComDlg.CommonDialog CommonDialog1
Left
=
1635
Top
=
765
_ExtentX
=
847
_ExtentY
=
847
_Version
=
393216
End
Begin VB.CommandButton cmdClose
Cancel
=
-1 ‘True
Caption
=
“Close”
Height
=
372
Left
=
2400
TabIndex
=
3
Top
=
735
Width
=
972
End
Begin VB.CommandButton cmdStoreImage
Caption
=
“Print”
Default
=
-1 ‘True
Height
=
372
Left
=
240
TabIndex
=
2
Top
=
735
Width
=
972
End
Begin VB.TextBox txtFile
Height
=
288

114

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix B – Sample Programs

Left
TabIndex
Top
Width

=
=
=
=

120
1
360
3492

End
Begin VB.Label Label1
Caption
=
“File Name”
Height
=
255
Left
=
120
TabIndex
=
0
Top
=
135
Width
=
1455
End
Begin VB.Menu File
Caption
=
“&File”
Begin VB.Menu open
Caption
=
“&Open”
End
Begin VB.Menu exit
Caption
=
“&Exit”
Shortcut
=
^Q
End
End
End
Attribute VB_Name = “Form1”
Attribute VB_GlobalNameSpace = False
Attribute VB_Creatable = False
Attribute VB_PredeclaredId = True
Attribute VB_Exposed = False
Option Explicit
‘**********************************
#If Win32 Then
Private Type DOC_INFO_1
pDocName As String
pOutputFile As String
pDatatype As String
End Type
#End If ‘WIN32 Types
‘**********************************
‘** Function Declarations:
#If Win32 Then
Private Declare Function OpenPrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” Alias
“OpenPrinterA” (ByVal pPrinterName As String, phPrinter As Long, ByVal
pDefault As Long) ‘ Third param changed to long
Private Declare Function StartDocPrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” Alias
“StartDocPrinterA” (ByVal hPrinter As Long, ByVal Level As Long,
pDocInfo As DOC_INFO_1)

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

115

Appendix B – Sample Programs

Private Declare Function StartPagePrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal
hPrinter As Long)
Private Declare Function WritePrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal
hPrinter As Long, pBuf As Any, ByVal cdBuf As Long, pcWritten As Long)
Private Declare Function EndDocPrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal
hPrinter As Long)
Private Declare Function EndPagePrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal
hPrinter As Long)
Private Declare Function ClosePrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal
hPrinter As Long)
#End If ‘WIN32
Dim ch As String * 1, f1 As Integer, loadfile As String
Private Sub cmdOpenFile_Click()
On Error GoTo ErrHandler
‘ Set Filters
CommonDialog1.Filter = “All Files (*.*)|*.*”
‘Specify Default Filter
CommonDialog1.FilterIndex = 1
‘Display Open dialog box
CommonDialog1.ShowOpen
loadfile = CommonDialog1.FileName
Label2.Caption = loadfile
Exit Sub
ErrHandler:
Exit Sub
End Sub
Private Sub cmdStoreImage_Click()
Dim hPrinter&
Dim jobid&
Dim res&
Dim written&
Dim printdata$
Dim docinfo As DOC_INFO_1
loadfile = Form1.txtFile.Text
If loadfile = ““ Then
MsgBox “You must Open a file to send”, vbExclamation
Exit Sub
End If
‘ Open file.
f1 = FreeFile
Open loadfile For Binary As f1
‘ Open printer for printing
res& = OpenPrinter(SelPrinter, hPrinter, 0)
If res = 0 Then
MsgBox “Unable to open the printer”
Exit Sub
End If

116

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix B – Sample Programs

docinfo.pDocName = “MyDoc”
docinfo.pOutputFile = vbNullString
docinfo.pDatatype = vbNullString
jobid = StartDocPrinter(hPrinter, 1, docinfo)
Call StartPagePrinter(hPrinter)
Call WritePrinter(hPrinter, ByVal printdata$, Len(printdata$),
written)
While Not EOF(1)
Get #f1, , ch
printdata$ = ch
Call WritePrinter(hPrinter, ByVal printdata$, Len(printdata$),
written)
Wend
Call EndPagePrinter(hPrinter)
Call EndDocPrinter(hPrinter)
Call ClosePrinter(hPrinter) ‘ Close when done
‘ Close file
Close #1
MsgBox “File sent to print spooler.”, vbExclamation
End Sub
Private Sub cmdClose_Click()
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub exit_Click()
End
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
Dim X As Printer
‘ search for printer queue name / driver name
For Each X In Printers
If X.Port = “LPT1:” Then ‘printer found
‘ Set printer as system default.
SelPrinter = X.DeviceName
Exit For
End If
Next
End Sub
Private Sub lpt2_Click()
End Sub
Private Sub open_Click()
CommonDialog1.ShowOpen
loadfile = CommonDialog1.FileName
txtFile.Text = loadfile
End Sub

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

117

Appendix B – Sample Programs

Private Sub Printer_Click()
CommonDialog1.ShowPrinter
End Sub

This will create the form pictured below:

þ Note:

118

It may be necessary to remove and reinsert the common dialog control due to Windows® registry
issues.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix

Available Fonts – Sizes, References, and Samples
All character bit-mapped fonts available on the printers are described in this section. Each font has a name
(Font ID) associated with it for use in programming. Use the Font Number (in the left column of Table C1) in field b of the Format Record header to cause the printer to use the corresponding font.
Fonts 0 through 8 use the slash zero (Ø) conventions for distinguishing between the zero and the
alphabetic O. The slash can be removed with the label formatting command z. These fonts are nonproportional (monospaced). Therefore, all of the characters take up the same amount of space when
printed. This is helpful when using variable data in a fixed area. The sizes of these fonts are shown on the
following pages.
The CG Triumvirate font number 9 is a proportional font. Each character will take up a different amount
of space when printed. For example, the letter W will be wider than the letter I.
Font
Number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

9
9

Valid ASCII Characters (decimal)
32-127, 255
32-168, 171, 172, 225, 255
32-168, 171, 172, 225, 255
32, 35-38, 40-58, 65-90, 128, 142-144, 146, 153, 154, 156, 157, 165,
168, 225, 255
32, 35-38, 40-58, 65-90, 128, 142-144, 146, 153, 154, 156, 157, 165,
168, 225, 255
32, 35-38, 40-58, 65-90, 128, 142-144, 146, 153, 154, 156, 157, 165,
168, 225, 255
32, 35-38, 40-58, 65-90, 128, 142-144, 146, 153, 154, 156, 157, 165,
168, 225, 255
32-126
32, 48-57, 60, 62, 67, 69, 78, 83, 84, 88, 90
32-126, 128-169, 171-173, 181-184, 189, 190, 198, 199, 208-216,
222, 224-237, 241, 243, 246-250, 255
Dependent upon selected symbol set, see Appendix H.

Use with Record
Structure Type

Internal
Bit-Mapped
Fonts

Smooth Font*
Scalable Font

*E-Class and M-4206.

Table C-1: Valid Human-Readable Font (Internal) ASCII Characters

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

119

Appendix C – Available Fonts

Font sizes are dependent upon the printhead resolution of the printer used; Tables C-2 to C-5 contain a
listing of the font sizes by resolution with dimensions given in dots.
Font
Font 0
Font 1
Font 2
Font 3
Font 4
Font 5
Font 6
Font 7
Font 8

Height
7
13
18
27
36
52
64
32
28

Width
5
7
10
14
18
18
32
15
15

Spacing
1
2
2
2
3
3
4
5
5

Point Size
2.5
4.6
6.4
9.6
12.8
18.4
22.7
11.3
9.9

Table C-2: Font Sizes @ 203 DPI Resolution

Font
Font 0
Font 1
Font 2
Font 3
Font 4
Font 5
Font 6
Font 7
Font 8

Height
10
19
27
40
53
77
95
47
41

Width
7
10
15
21
27
27
47
22
22

Spacing
1
3
3
3
4
4
6
7
7

Point Size
2.4
4.6
6.5
9.6
12.7
18.5
22.8
11.3
9.8

Table C-3: Font Sizes @ 300 DPI Resolution

Font
Font 0
Font 1
Font 2
Font 3
Font 4
Font 5
Font 6
Font 7
Font 8

Height
14
26
36
54
72
104
128
64
56

Width
10
14
20
28
36
36
64
30
30

Spacing
2
4
4
4
6
6
8
10
10

Point Size
2.5
4.6
6.4
9.6
12.8
18.4
22.7
11.3
9.9

Table C-4: Font Sizes @ 406 DPI Resolution

120

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix C – Available Fonts

Font
Font 0
Font 1
Font 2
Font 3
Font 4
Font 5
Font 6
Font 7
Font 8

Height
20
38
54
80
106
154
190
94
82

Width
14
20
30
42
54
54
94
44
44

Spacing
2
6
6
6
8
8
12
14
14

Point Size
2.4
4.6
6.5
9.6
12.7
18.5
22.8
11.3
9.8

Table C-5: Font Sizes @ 600 DPI Resolution

Internal Smooth Font 9 (Smooth Font) Point Size Specifiers
Label format records with font code 9 (in Format Record header field b) can specify any of the font sizes
in the leftmost column of the table below. The corresponding specification in either column labeled Ann
or 0nn is used in the font size/selection (eee height) field to select the desired font size. Optional font
sets may contain subsets of those described here. For an optional font set that generates these fonts via
scalable font technology, the character mapping for this font is the selected scalable symbol set (see
Appendix E).
In the sample format below, a 300 DPI printer will use 4-point smooth font to produce a printed label
with the words “four point font”. Sample format:
L
1911A0400100010four point font
E
Point
Size
4
5
6
8
10
12
14
18
24
30
36
48
72

Smooth Font 9 Font Size Specification Syntax
Ann
[1]
203 DPI Print Resolution
300, 400, & 600 DPI Print Resolutions [2]
A04
A05
A06
A06
A08
A08
A10
A10
A12
A12
A14
A14
A18
A18
A24
A24
A30
A30
A36
A36
A48
A48
A72

0nn
000[3]
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
-

[1]

All fonts greater than A36 are created from multiples of smaller fonts, 2x or 3x, as available.
All fonts greater than A24 are created from multiples of smaller fonts, 2x or 3x, as available.
[3]
Available at 300 DPI and greater print resolutions only.
[2]

Table C-6: Internal Bit-Mapped (Smooth Font) 9 Size Chart

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

121

Appendix C – Available Fonts

Internal Bit-Mapped and Smooth Font Samples
The identifying number is used in the Format Record header field b to cause the printer to use the
corresponding font.
þ Note:

The Euro currency character ( ) has been added to Fonts 0 – 6. For the E-Class and M-4206 only, the
character is also present in Font 9.

0: Identifies a 96-character alphanumeric font, uppercase and lowercase.

1: Identifies a 145-character uppercase and lowercase alphanumeric font that includes desenders and
ascenders.

2: Identifies a 138-character alphanumeric upper and lowercase font.

3: Identifies a 62-character alphanumeric uppercase font.

4: Identifies a 62-character alphanumeric uppercase font.

122

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix C – Available Fonts

5: Identifies a 62-character alphanumeric upper case font.

6: Identifies a 62-character alphanumeric uppercase font.

7: Identifies a font that prints OCR-A, size I.

8: Identifies a font that prints OCR-B, size III.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

123

Appendix C – Available Fonts

9: Identifies the Internal CG Triumvirate font. Point sizes are selected by the number in the Format
Record header eee height field, see Table C-6.

124

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix

Reset Codes
The most common transmitted error codes are:

Uppercase “R”
This code is sent every time the printer is turned ‘On’, signaling a hardware reset.

Uppercase “T”
This code signals a software reset. A software reset is made by sending the command sequence to the
printer or by performing a reset using the front panel keys.

Lowercase “v”
There is an input buffer overflow situation, caused when an overflow of data is sent to the printer.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

125

Appendix D – Reset Codes

126

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix

Single Byte Symbol Sets
The following tables include some of the sixty-six standard symbol sets. Not all of these symbol sets can
be used with every font. Symbol sets containing the Euro currency character are W1, WE, WG, WL, WT,
WR, and PM; see Appendix I, and the y command.
The following sets were produced using a Windows-based PC-compatible with an English (United
States) keyboard properties layout. Results may vary if printing this document using a different input
locale.

þ Note:

(DN) ISO 60: Danish / Norwegian Symbol Set
0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

0
@
P
‘
p

!
1
A
Q
a
q

“
2
B
R
b
r

#
3
C
S
c
s

$
4
D
T
d
t

%
5
E
U
e
u

&
6
F
V
f
v

‘
7
G
W
g
w

(
8
H
X
h
x

)
9
I
Y
i
y

*
:
J
Z
j
z

+
;
K
Æ
k
æ

,
<
L
Ø
l
ø

=
M
Å
m
å

.
>
N
^
n
¯

/
?
O
_
o
¦

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

0
@
P
‘
p

!
1
A
Q
a
q

“
2
B
R
b
r

#
3
C
S
c
s

$
4
D
T
d
t

%
5
E
U
e
u

&
6
F
V
f
v

‘
7
G
W
g
w

(
8
H
X
h
x

)
9
I
Y
i
y

*
:
J
Z
j
z

+
;
K
[
k
{

,
<
L
\
l
|

=
M
]
m
}

.
>
N
^
n
~

/
?
O
o
¦

¶
“

§
µ

†
‰

‡



•

©
l

®

“

=

C0
D0

–
(

±
)

×
«

÷
»

°
‚

′
„

″
‘

E0
F0

ª
‘

º
‘

æ
ˆ

Æ
¨

ð
˜

Ð
?

ij
?

00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70

(DT) DeskTop Symbol Set
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

¢

–

—

þ

✟

•

?

…
‘

fi
¬

fl
¦

¼
¡

½
¿

¾
Pt

¹

²
£

³
¥

/
¤

ƒ

ß

IJ
”

t
°

t
·

Œ
,

ø
?

Ø
'

þ
l

Þ

o

l
œ
¯

127

Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets

(E1) ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 Symbol Set
0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

0
@
P
‘
p

!
1
A
Q
a
q

“
2
B
R
b
r

#
3
C
S
c
s

$
4
D
T
d
t

%
5
E
U
e
u

&
6
F
V
f
v

‘
7
G
W
g
w

(
8
H
X
h
x

)
9
I
Y
i
y

*
:
J
Z
j
z

+
;
K
[
k
{

,
<
L
\
l
|

=
M
]
m
}

.
>
N
^
n
~

/
?
O
o
¦

°
À
Ð
à
ð

¡
±
Á
Ñ
á
ñ

¢
²
Â
Ò
â
ò

£
³
Ã
Ó
ã
ó

¤
´
Ä
Ô
ä
ô

¥
µ
Å
Õ
å
õ

¦
¶
Æ
Ö
æ
ö

§
·
Ç
×
ç
÷

¨
¸
È
Ø
è
ø

©
¸
É
Ù
é
ù

ª
¹
Ê
Ú
ê
ú

«
»
Ë
Û
ë
û

¬
¼
Ì
Ü
ì
ü

½
Í
Ý
í
ý

®
¾
Î
Þ
î
þ

¯
¿
Ï
ß
ï
ÿ

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0

0
@
P
‘
p

!
1
A
Q
a
q

“
2
B
R
b
r

#
3
C
S
c
s

$
4
D
T
d
t

%
5
E
U
e
u

&
6
F
V
f
v

‘
7
G
W
g
w

(
8
H
X
h
x

)
9
I
Y
i
y

*
:
J
Z
j
z

+
;
K
[
k
{

,
<
L
\
l
|

=
M
]
m
}

.
>
N
^
n
~

/
?
O
o
¦

?

§

¨

°

Š

·

Z

º

L
l

¤

B0

´

·

¸

¹

š

“

z
Î

ü

Í
Ý
í
ý

00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0

(E2) ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 Set

C0
D0
E0
F0

Á

Â

Ð

ó

Ä
Ô
ä
ô

Ó
á

â

Ö
ö

Ç
×
ç
÷

É
Ø

Ë
Ú

é

Ü
ë

ú

ß
î

(E5) ISO 8859/5 Latin 5 Set
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0

128

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

0
@
P
‘
p

!
1
A
Q
a
q

“
2
B
R
b
r

#
3
C
S
c
s

$
4
D
T
d
t

%
5
E
U
e
u

&
6
F
V
f
v

‘
7
G
W
g
w

(
8
H
X
h
x

)
9
I
Y
i
y

*
:
J
Z
j
z

+
;
K
[
k
{

,
<
L
\
l
|

=
M
]
m
}

.
>
N
^
n
~

/
?
O
o
¦

¡
±
Á
Ñ
á
ñ

¢
²
Â
Ò
â
ò

£
³
Ã
Ó
ã
ó

¤
´
Ä
Ô
ä
ô

¥
µ
Å
Õ
å
õ

¦
¶
Æ
Ö
æ
ö

§
·
Ç
×
ç
÷

¨
¸
È
Ø
è
ø


¹
É
Ù
é
ù

ª
º
Ê
Ú
ê
ú

«
»
Ë
Û
ë
û

¬
¼
Ì
Ü
ì
ü

½
Í


¾
Î

í
I

î

¯
¿
Ï
ß
ï
ÿ

º
À
à

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets

(FR) ISO 69: French Symbol Set
0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

0
à
P
µ
p

!
1
A
Q
a
q

“
2
B
R
b
r

£
3
C
S
c
s

$
4
D
T
d
t

%
5
E
U
e
u

&
6
F
V
f
v

‘
7
G
W
g
w

(
8
H
X
h
x

)
9
I
Y
i
y

*
:
J
Z
j
z

+
;
K
º
k
é

,
<
L
ç
l
ù

=
M
§
m
è

.
>
N
^
n
¨

/
?
O
_
o
¦

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

!

“

#

$

%

&

(

)

*

+

.

/

1
A
Q
a
q

2
B
R
b
r

3
C
S
c
s

4
D
T
d
t

5
E
U
e
u

6
F
V
f
v

8
H
X
h
x

9
I
Y
i
y

:
J
Z
j
z

;
K
Ä
k
ä

?
<
L
Ö
l
ö

-

0
§
P
‘
p

?
7
G
W
g
w

=
M
Ü
m
ü

>
N
^
n
ß

?
O
_
o
¦

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

0
§
P
ù
p

!
1
A
Q
a
q

“
2
B
R
b
r

£
3
C
S
c
s

$
4
D
T
d
t

%
5
E
U
e
u

&
6
F
V
f
v

‘
7
G
W
g
w

(
8
H
X
h
x

)
9
I
Y
i
y

*
:
J
Z
j
z

+
;
K
º
k
à

,
<
L
ç
l
ò

=
M
é
m
è

.
>
N
^
n
ì

/
?
O
_
o
¦

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

00
10
20
30

!
1

“
2

#
3

$
4

%
5

&
6

‘
7

(
8

)
9

*
:

+
;

,
=

=

.

0

/
?

40
50
60
70

@
P
°
p

A
Q
a
q

B
R
b
r

C
S
c
s

D
T
d
t

E
U
e
u

F
V
f
v

G
W
g
w

H
X
h
x

I
Y
i
y

J
Z
j
z

K
[
k
§

L

l
¶

M
]
m
†

00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70

(GR) ISO 21: German Symbol Set
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70

(IT) ISO 15: Italian Symbol Set
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70

(LG) Legal Symbol Set

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

¢
N

n
™

O
_
o
¦

129

Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets

(MC) Macintosh Symbol Set
0
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0

0
@
P
`
p
Ä
ê
†
8

C0
D0

¿

E0
F0

‡

–

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

!
1
A
Q
a
q
Å
ë
º

“
2
B
R
b
r
Ç
í

#
3
C
S
c
s
É
ì
£
=

$
4
D
T
d
t
Ñ
î
§

%
5
E
U
e
u
Ö
ï
•

&
6
F
V
f
v
Ü
ñ
¶

(
8
H
X
h
x
à
ò
®
∏

∫

+
;
K
[
k
{
ã
õ
´
ª

,
<
L
\
l
|
å
ú
¨
°

=
M
]
m
}
ç
ù
≠
O

.
>
N
^
n
~
é
û
Æ
æ

/
?
O
_
o

∂

)
9
I
Y
i
y
â
ô
©
p

*
:
J
Z
j
z
ä
ö
™

µ

‘
7
G
W
g
w
á
ó
ß
S

˜

∆
÷

»
ÿ

…
Ÿ

À

Ã

◊

/

¤

<

Õ
>

Œ
fi

œ
fl

Ê
ˆ

Á
˜

Ë
¯

È

Í
?

Î
º

Ï
¸

Ì
¨

Ó
?

Ô
?

B

C

D

E

F

?

?

?

R

?
,
<
L
\
l
|

↔

✟

✟

=
M
]
m
}

.
>
N
^
n
~

/
?
O
_
o

Ä
Pt
«
+
+
¦
?
¦

±

¢
=

¡
—

¬
“

v

¥
f

“

‘

‘

`
Ò

‚
Ú

„
Û

‰
Ù

Â


«

?

è
ü
Ø
Ø

(PC) PC-8 Code Page 437 Symbol Set
0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

♦
¶

♣
§

♠
-

l
?

8

9

A

00
10

J
✟

♥
!!

↑

↓

→

←

20
30
40
50
60
70

0
@
P
`
p

!
1
A
Q
a
q

“
2
B
R
b
r

#
3
C
S
c
s

$
4
D
T
d
t

%
5
E
U
e
u

&
6
F
V
f
v

‘
7
G
W
g
w

(
8
H
X
h
x

)
9
I
Y
i
y

*
:
J
Z
j
z

+
;
K
[
k
{

80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0

Ç
É
á
¦
+
a
=

ü
æ
í
¦
ß
±

é
Æ
ó
¦
+
≥

â
ô
ú
¦
+
+
p
≤

ä
ö
ñ
¦
+
?
(

à
ò
Ñ
¦
+
+
s
)

å
û
ª
¦
¦
+
µ
÷

ç
ù
°
+
¦
+
?
˜

ê
ÿ
¿
+
+
+
?
?

ë
Ö
¬
¦
+
+
T
?

è
Ü
¬
¦
+
?
?

ï
¢
½
+
¦
d
v

î
£
¼
+
¦
_
8

ì
¥
¡
+
¦
?

n

2

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

B

C

D

E

F

♦
¶

♣
§

♠
?

l
?

?

?

?

R

¦
Å
ƒ
»
+
¯
n

(PD) PC-8 D/N, Code Page 437N Symbol Set
8

9

A

00
10

J
✟

♥
!!

↑

↓

→

←

✟

✟

0
@
P
`
p

!
1
A
Q
a
q

“
2
B
R
b
r

#
3
C
S
c
s

$
4
D
T
d
t

%
5
E
U
e
u

&
6
F
V
f
v

‘
7
G
W
g
w

(
8
H
X
h
x

)
9
I
Y
i
y

*
:
J
Z
j
z

+
;
K
[
k
{

?
,
<
L
\
l
|

↔

20
30
40
50
60
70

=
M
]
m
}

.
>
N
^
n
~

/
?
O
_
o

¦

80
90

Ç
É

ü
æ

é
Æ

â
ô

ä
ö

à
ò

å
û

ç
ù

ê
ÿ

ë
Ö

è
Ü

ï
ø

î
£

ì
Ø

Ä

Å

A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0

á
¦
+
a
=

í
¦
ß
±

ó
¦
+
≥

ú
¦
+
+
p
≤

ñ
¦
+
?
(

Ñ
¦
+
+
s
)

õ
¦
¦
+
µ
÷

Õ
+
¦
+
?
˜

¿
+
+
+
?
?

ã
¦
+
+
T
?

Ã
¦
+
?
?

l
+
¦
d
v

?
+
¦
_
8

¡
+
¦
?

?
¤
+
¯
n

n

2

?
³
+
+
¦
?
¦

130

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets

(PE) PC-852 Latin 2 Symbol Set
0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

✟

♥
!!

♦
¶

♣
§

♠
?

l
?

↑

↓

→

←

%
5
E
U
e
u

&
6
F
V
f
v

‘
7
G
W
g
w

(
8
H
X
h
x

)
9
I
Y
i
y

*
:
J
Z
j
z

+
;
K
[
k
{

ç

l

ë

00
10

J

20
30
40
50
60
70

0
@
P
`
p

!
1
A
Q
a
q

“
2
B
R
b
r

#
3
C
S
c
s

$
4
D
T
d
t

80

Ç

ü

é

â

ä

ô

ö

90

É

A0
B0

á
¦

í
¦

ó
¦

ú
¦

C0
D0
E0
F0

+
ð
Ó

Ð
ß
“

-

?

Ž
Â

ž

Í
Š
÷

Î
š

¦

Á

+
Ë

-

+

?

?

?

2

3

4

„

‚

“

“

‘

‘

?

ä

æ

å

ã

Ô
§

8

+

¸

°

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

?

?

?

R

?
,
<
L
\
l
|

↔

✟

✟

=
M
]
m
}

.
>
N
^
n
~

/
?
O
_
o

î

Ö

Ü

¦

¦

+

+

+
+
Ú
¨

+

¦

¦
_
ý

¦

Ä

L
-

×
«

»

+

?
¤
¯
´

Ý
n

´

(PI) PI Font Symbol Set
0

1

00
10
20

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

〈

〉

™



>

?
<



∆

«

§

L

l

∇

30

¯

40

::

∆

50

P

℘

60

+

+

?

?

+

+

-

? ?

U

I

?

70

+

+

?

+

?

?

+

-

¦

-

¦

?

?

+

+

¦

✟

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

B

C

D

✟
!!

✟
¶

✟
§

✟

✟

?

?

?

?

f

h

∑

?

E

F

»

¶

‹

›

¦

(PM) PC-850 Multilingual Symbol Set*
00
10

J

20

!

8

9

A

E

é

ê

è

ç

‘

(

)

*

+

‚

¨

·

/
?
O
_
o

✟

✟

#

$

%

?
&

3
C
S
c
s

4
D
T
d
t

5
E
U
e
u

6
F
V
f
v

7
G
W
g
w

8
H
X
h
x

9
I
Y
i
y

:
J
Z
j
z

;
K
[
k
{

<
L
\
l
|

=
M
]
m
}

>
N
^
n
~

¦

è
Ü

ï
ø
½

î
£
¼

ì
Ø
¡

Ä
×
«

Å
ƒ
»

¢

¥

+
¤

30
40
50
60
70

0
@
P
`
p

1
A
Q
a
q

“
2
B
R
b
r

80
90
A0

Ç
É
á

ü
æ
í

é
Æ
ó

â
ô
ú

ä
ö
ñ

à
ò
Ñ

å
û
ª

ç
ù
°

ê
ÿ
¿

ë
Ö


¦

¦

¦

¦

¦

?

B0

Á

Â

À

©

¦

¦

+

+

+

ã

Ã

-

-

¦

-

+

?
þ

+
Î

+

l

+

+

¦

Þ

Ù
“

Û

Ú
¹

_
ý

?
Ý

Ì
¯

³

²

?

C0

F
R

D0

+
ð

Ð

Ê

+
Ë

È

E0

Ó

ß

Ô

Ò

õ

i
Õ

F0

-

±

=

¾

¶

§

µ
÷

¸

º

.

¯
´

*Default Symbol Set

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

131

Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets

(PT) PC-8 TK, Code Page 437T Symbol Set
0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

?

✟

✟

✟

✟

?

9

A

B

00

J

10
20
30
40
50
60
70

0
@
P
`
p

!
1
A
Q
a
q

″
2
B
R
b
r

!!
#
3
C
S
c
s

¶
$
4
D
T
d
t

§
%
5
E
U
e
u

—
&
6
F
V
f
v

‘
7
G
W
g
w

é
(
8
H
X
h
x

ê
)
9
I
Y
i
y

è
*
:
J
Z
j
z

ç
+
;
K
[
k
{

80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0

Ç
É
á
¦
+
a
=

ü
æ
í
¦
ß
±

é
Æ
ó
¦
+
≥

â
ô
ú
¦
+
+
p
≤

ä
ö
ñ
¦
+
?
(

à
ò
Ñ
¦
+
+
s
)

å
û
ª
¦
¦
+
µ
÷

ç
ù
°
+
¦
+
?
˜

ê
ÿ
¬
+
+
+
?
?

ë
Ö
¬
¦
+
+
T
?

è
Ü
½
¦
+
?
?

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0
@
P
‘
p

!
1
A
Q
a
q

“
2
B
R
b
r

#
3
C
S
c
s

$
4
D
T
d
t

%
5
E
U
e
u

&
6
F
V
f
v

‘
7
G
W
g
w

(
8
H
X
h
x

â
Å
Á
Þ

À
Ý
ê
î
Ã
þ

Â
ý
ô
Ø
ã
·

È
º
û
Æ
Ð
µ

Ê
Ç
á
å
ð
¶

Ë
ç
é
Í
Í
¾

Î
Ñ
ó
ø
Ì
—

Ï
ñ
ú
æ
Ó
¼

?
¡
à
Ä
Ò
½

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

0
§
P
`
p

!
1
A
Q
a
q

“
2
B
R
b
r

£
3
C
S
c
s

$
4
D
T
d
t

%
5
E
U
e
u

&
6
F
V
f
v

´
7
G
W
g
w

(
8
H
X
h
x

C

D

E

F
R

‚
<
L
\
l
|

=
M
]
m
}

ï
¢
¼
+
¦
d
v

î
£
¡
+
¦
_
8

ì
¥
¡
+
¦
?

n

2

A

B

C

)
9
I
Y
i
y

*
:
J
Z
j
z

+
;
K
[
k
{

`
¿
è
ì
Õ
ª

ˆ
¤
ò
Ö
õ
°

9

)
9
I
Y
i
y

✟
·
>
N
^
n
~

✟
/
?
O
_
o

¦

Ä
Pt
«
+
+
¦
?
¦

Å
ƒ
»
+
¯
n

D

E

F

,
<
L
\
l
|

=
M
]
m
}

.
>
N
^
n
~

/
?
O
o
¦

“
£
ù
Ü
Š
«

˜
¥
ä
É
š
✟

Ù
§
ë
Ï
Ú
»

Û
ƒ
ö
ß
Ÿ
±

£
¢
ü
Ô
ÿ

A

B

C

D

E

F

*
:
J
Z
j
z

+
;
K
¡
k
º

,
<
L
Ñ
l
ñ

=
M
¿
m
ç

.
>
N
^
n
~

/
?
O
_
o
¦

(R8) Roman-8 Symbol Set
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0

(SP) ISO 17: Spanish Symbol Set
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70

132

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets

(SW) ISO 11: Swedish Symbol Set
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

0
É
P
é
p

!
1
A
Q
a
q

“
2
B
R
b
r

#
3
C
S
c
s

¤
4
D
T
d
t

%
5
E
U
e
u

&
6
F
V
f
v

‘
7
G
W
g
w

(
8
H
X
h
x

)
9
I
Y
i
y

*
:
J
Z
j
z

+
;
K
Ä
k
ä

,
<
L
Ö
l
ö

=
M
Å
m
å

.
>
N
Ü
n
ü

/
?
O
_
o
¦

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

0
@
P
`
p

!
1
A
Q
a
q

“
2
B
R
b
r

#
3
C
S
c
s

$
4
D
T
d
t

%
5
E
U
e
u

&
6
F
V
f
v

‘
7
G
W
g
w

(
8
H
X
h
x

)
9
I
Y
i
y

*
:
J
Z
j
z

+
;
K
[
k
{

,
<
L
\
l
|

=
M
]
m
}

.
>
N
^
n
~

/
?
O
_
o

¡
`

¢
†
´

£
‡
ˆ

/
·
˜

¥

ƒ
¶
?

§
•
?

¤
,
¨

‘
„

“
“
°

«
»
¸

‹
…

›
‰
“

?
?

?
¿
?

L
l

Ø

Œ

º

ø

œ

ß

(TS) PS Text Symbol Set
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0

¯

—
Æ

ª


æ

F0

(UK) ISO 4: United Kingdom Symbol Set
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

0
@
P
`
p

!
1
A
Q
a
q

“
2
B
R
b
r

£
3
C
S
c
s

$
4
D
T
d
t

%
5
E
U
e
u

&
6
F
V
f
v

‘
7
G
W
g
w

(
8
H
X
h
x

)
9
I
Y
i
y

*
:
J
Z
j
z

+
;
K
[
k
{

,
<
L
\
l
|

=
M
]
m
}

.
>
N
^
n
?

/
?
O
_
o
¦

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

0
@
P
‘
p

!
1
A
Q
a
q

“
2
B
R
b
r

#
3
C
S
c
s

$
4
D
T
d
t

%
5
E
U
e
u

&
6
F
V
f
v

‘
7
G
W
g
w

(
8
H
X
h
x

)
9
I
Y
i
y

*
:
J
Z
j
z

+
;
K
[
k
{

,
<
L
\
l
|

·
=
M
]
m
}

.
>
N
^
n
~

/
?
O
o
¦

(US) ISO 6: ASCII Symbol Set
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

133

Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets

(VI) Ventura International Symbol Set
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

0
@
P
`
p

!
1
A
Q
a
q

“
2
B
R
b
r

#
3
C
S
c
s

$
4
D
T
d
t

%
5
E
U
e
u

&
6
F
V
f
v

‘
7
G
W
g
w

(
8
H
X
h
x

)
9
I
Y
i
y

*
:
J
Z
j
z

+
;
K
[
k
{

,
<
L
\
l
|

=
M
]
m
}

.
>
N
^
n
~

/
?
O
_
o

↵

✟

?

™
¤
ò
Ö
õ
º

‹
£
ù
Ü
Š
«

›
¥
ä
É
š
•

Ú
§
ë
ï
Ú
»

Û
ƒ
ö
ß
Ÿ

Ë
ç
é
í
Í
—

Î
Ñ
ó
ø
Ì
–

Ï
ñ
ú
æ
Ó


¡
à
Ä
Ò


¿
è
ì
Õ
ª

¦

?

„
‰
â
Å
Á
Œ

À
“
ê
î
Ã
œ

Â
“
ô
Ø
ã
¶

È
º
û
Æ

Ê
Ç
á
å

†

‡

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

0
@
P
‘
p

!
1
A
Q
a
q

“
2
B
R
b
r

#
3
C
S
c
s

$
4
D
T
d
t

%
5
E
U
e
u

&
6
F
V
f
v

‘
7
G
W
g
w

(
8
H
X
h
x

)
9
I
Y
i
y

*
:
J
Z
j
z

+
;
K
[
k
{

,
<
L
\
l
|

=
M
]
m
}

.
>
N
^
n
~

/
?
O
_
o

¢
ü
Ô
ÿ
…

(VU) Ventura US Symbol Set
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0

↵
„
‰


“



?

?

¦

?

™
¢

§

“

º

¶

†

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

!
1
A
Q
a
q

“
2
B
R
b
r
‚
‘
¢
²
Â
Ò
â
ò

#
3
C
S
c
s
ƒ
“
£
³
Ã
Ó
ã
ó

$
4
D
T
d
t
„
“
¤
´
Ä
Ô
ä
ô

%
5
E
U
e
u
…
•
¥
µ
Å
Õ
å
õ

&
6
F
V
f
v
†
–
¦
¶
Æ
Ö
æ
ö

‘
7
G
W
g
w
‡
—
§
·
Ç
×
ç
÷

(
8
H
X
h
x
ˆ
˜
¨
¸
È
Ø
è
ø

)
9
I
Y
i
y
‰
™
©
¹
É
Ù
é
ù

*
:
J
Z
j
z
Š
š
ª
º
Ê
Ú
ê
ú

+
;
K
[
k
{
‹
›
«
»
Ë
Û
ë
û

,
<
L
\
l
|
Œ
œ
¬
¼
Ì
Ü
ì
ü

=
M
]
m
}

.
>
N
^
n
~

/
?
O
_
o
¦

½
Í
Ý
í
ý

®
¾
Î
Þ
î
þ

Ÿ
¯
¿
Ï
ß
ï
ÿ

‡

—

•

–

…

(W1) Windows 3.1 Latin 1 Symbol Set
0
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0

134

0
@
P
`
p
€

°
À
Ð
à
ð

‘
¡
±
Á
Ñ
á
ñ

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets

(WE) Windows 3.1 Latin 2 Symbol Set
0
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0

0
@
P
`
p
€

B0

º

C0
D0
E0
F0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

!
1
A
Q
a
q

#
3
C
S
c
s

$
4
D
T
d
t
„
“
¤

%
5
E
U
e
u
…
•

&
6
F
V
f
v
†
–
¦

‘
7
G
W
g
w
‡
—
§

(
8
H
X
h
x

)
9
I
Y
i
y
‰
™


*
:
J
Z
j
z
Š
š

+
;
K
[
k
{
‹
›
«

,
<
L
\
l
|

=
M
]
m
}

.
>
N
^
n
~
Ž
ž

/
?
O
_
o
¦

‘
?

“
2
B
R
b
r
‚
‘
?

-



±

?

´

µ

¶

·

¸

Á

Â

Ð

“

L
l
Ó

á

â
ó

Ä
Ô
ä
ô

Ö
ö

¨

Ç
×
ç
÷

¬

»
É

“

Ë
Ú

é

Î

ü

Í
Ý
í
ý

Ü
ë

ú

ß
î

(WO) Windows 3.0 Latin 1 Symbol Set
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

0
@
P
`
p

!
1
A
Q
a
q

“
2
B
R
b
r

#
3
C
S
c
s

$
4
D
T
d
t

%
5
E
U
e
u

&
6
F
V
f
v

‘
7
G
W
g
w

(
8
H
X
h
x

)
9
I
Y
i
y

*
:
J
Z
j
z

+
;
K
[
k
{

,
<
L
\
l
|

=
M
]
m
}

.
>
N
^
n
˜

/
?
O
_
o
¦

’
¢

°
À
Ð
à
ð

`
¡
±
Á
Ñ
á
ñ

²
Â
Ò
â
ò

£
³
Ã
Ó
ã
ó

¤
´
Ä
Ô
ä
ô

¥
µ
Å
Õ
å
õ

¦
¶
Æ
Ö
æ
ö

§
·
Ç
×
ç
÷

¨
¸
È
Ø
è
ø


¹
É
Ù
é
ù

ª
º
Ê
Ú
ê
ú

«
»
Ë
Û
ë
û

¬
¼
Ì
Ü
ì
ü

½
Í
Ý
í
ý


¾
Î
Þ
î
þ

¯
¿
Ï
ß
ï
ÿ

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

!
1
A
Q
a
q

˜
2
B
R
b
r
,
‘
¢
²
Â
Ò
â
ò

#
3
C
S
c
s
ƒ
“
£
³
Ã
Ó
ã
ó

$
4
D
T
d
t
„
“
¤
´
Ä
Ô
ä
ô

%
5
E
U
e
u
…
•
¥
µ
Å
Õ
å
õ

&
6
F
V
f
v
†
–
¦
¶
Æ
Ö
æ
ö

‘
7
G
W
g
w
‡
—
§
·
Ç
×
ç
÷

(
8
H
X
h
x
ˆ
˜
¨
¸
È
Ø
è
ø

)
9
I
Y
i
y
‰
™
©
¹
É
Ù
é
ù

*
:
J
Z
j
z
Š
š
ª
º
Ê
Ú
ê
ú

+
;
K
[
k
{
‹
›
«
»
Ë
Û
ë
û

‚
<
L
\
l
|
Œ
œ
¬
¼
Ì
Ü
ì
ü

=
M
]
m
}

.
>
N
^
n
~

/
?
O
_
o
¦

½
Í

®
¾
Î

í
l

î

(WT) Windows 3.1 Latin 5 Symbol Set
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0

0
@
P
`
p
€

°
À
à

‘
¡
±
Á
Ñ
á
ñ

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Ÿ
¯
¿
Ï
ß
ï
ÿ

135

Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets

136

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix
Bar Code Summary Data
Bar code fonts have alpha names (left column, below). Uppercase alpha names will print bar codes with human-readable interpretations, if
supported. Lowercase alpha names will print bar codes only. Place the ID in field b of the Format Record header to cause the printer to encode the
data field using the associated bar code symbology, see Appendix G for details. See Table F-2 for default values. The column labeled “Linear
Scanner Supported” provides an indication that printers equipped with a Linear Scanner are capable of recognizing the associated barcode
symbology.
Bar
Code
ID
A / a
B / b
C / c
D / d
E / e
F / f
G / g
H / h
I / i
J / j
K / k
L / l
M / m
N / n
O / o
p
Q / q
R / r
S / s
T / t
U

Symbology

Length

Code 39
Varies
UPC-A
11
UPC-E
6
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I2 of 5)
Varies
Code 128
Varies
EAN-13
12
EAN-8
7
HBIC
Varies
Codabar
Varies
Interleaved 2 of 5 w/ a modulo 10 checksum
Varies
Plessey
Up to 14
Interleaved 2 of 5 w/ modulo 10 checksum & bearer bars
13
2 digit UPC addendum
2
5 digit UPC addendum
5
Code 93
Varies
Postnet
Varies
UCC/EAN 128
19
UCC/EAN 128 K-Mart non-EDI
18
UCC/EAN 128 Random Weight
34 +
Telepen
Varies
UPS MaxiCode
84

Checksum
No
Yes
Yes
No
M-103
Yes
Yes
M-43
No
M-10
M-10
M-10
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Linear
Scanner
Supported
ü
32, 36, 37, 42, 43, 45-57, 65-90
ü
48-57 Numeric only. Option V used in the 6th & 7th position
ü
48-57 Numeric only
ü
48-57 Numeric only
ü
32-127
ü
48-57 Numeric only. Option V used in 7th & 8th position
ü
48-57 Numeric only
ü
32, 36-39, 42, 43, 45-57, 65-90
ü
36, 43, 45-58, 65-68
ü
48-57 Numeric only
ü
48-57 Numeric only. Option + is last character for 2nd M-11 chksum
ü
48-57 Numeric only
48-57 Numeric only
[1]
48-57 Numeric only
[1]
ü
35-38, 42-58, 65-90, 97-122
48-57 Numeric only
ü
48-57 Numeric only
ü
48-57 Numeric only
ü
48-57 Numeric only
Alphanumeric
Alphanumeric
Valid ASCII Characters, decimal value representation

Table F-1: Bar Code Characteristics

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

137

Appendix F – Barcode Summary Data

Bar
Symbology
Length Checksum
Valid ASCII Characters, decimal value representation
Code
ID
u
UPS MaxiCode w/ Byte Count
Specified
Yes
Alphanumeric
v
FIM
1
No
A, B, C, D
z
PDF417
Varies
Yes
All
Z
PDF417 w/ Byte Count
Specified
Yes
All
W1c
DataMatrix
Varies
Yes
All 8-bit values
W1C
DataMatrix w/ Byte Count
Specified
Yes
All 8-bit values
W1d
QR Code – Auto format
Varies
Yes
Alphanumeric
W1D
QR Code – Manual format
Varies
Yes
Single-byte or Kanji double-byte
W1f
Aztec
Varies
Yes
All 8-bit values
W1F
Aztec w/ Byte Count
Specified
Yes
All 8-bit values
W1G / g USD-8 (Code 11)
Varies
Yes
45, 48-57
W1I
EAN 128 w/auto subset switching [2]
Varies
Yes
32-127
W1J
Code 128 w/auto subset switching [2]
Varies
Yes
32-127
W1k
RSS (six types) [2]
Varies
Yes
Numeric / Alphanumeric (type dependant)
W1R
UCC/EAN Code 128 K-MART NON EDI
18
Yes
48-57 Numeric only
W1t
TCIF Linked Bar Code 3 of 9 (TLC39)
Varies
Yes
Alphanumeric
W1z
MicroPDF417
Varies
Yes
All 8-bit values
W1Z
MicroPDF417 w/ Byte Count
Specified
Yes
All 8-bit values
[1]
Readable with the Linear Scanner Option only when using ‘Barcode Count’ (see the I-Class Operator’s Manual for details).
[2]
Bar codes available only with display-equipped printer models.

Linear
Scanner
Supported

ü
ü

Table F-1: Bar Code Characteristics (continued)

138

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix F – Barcode Summary Data

Bar Code Default Widths and Heights
Font
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
p
Q
R
S
T

203 DPI Resolutions
Height
Ratio/
(inches)
Module Size
.40
6:2
.80
3
.80
3
.40
5:2
.40
2
.80
3
.80
3
.40
6:2
.40
6:3
.40
5:2
.40
5:2
1.30
5:2
.90
3
.80
3
.40
6:3
.08
N/A
1.40
2
1.40
2
1.40
2
.80
1

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

300 DPI Resolutions
400 DPI Resolutions
Height
Ratio/
Height
Ratio/
(inches)
Module Size
(inches)
Module Size
.40
9:4
.40
12:4
.80
4
.80
6
.80
4
.80
6
.40
9:4
.40
10:4
.40
4
.40
4
.80
4
.80
6
.80
4
.80
6
.40
9:4
.40
12:4
.40
9:4
.40
12:6
.40
9:4
.40
10:4
.40
9:4
.40
10:4
1.30
9:4
1.30
10:4
.90
4
.90
6
.80
4
.80
6
.40
8:4
.40
12:6
.08
N/A
.08
N/A
1.40
4
1.40
4
1.40
4
1.40
4
1.40
3
1.40
4
.80
1
.80
2
Table F-2: Bar Code Default Data

600 DPI Resolutions
Height
Ratio/
(inches)
Module Size
.40
18:6
.80
9
.80
9
.40
15:6
.40
6
.80
9
.80
9
.40
18:6
.40
18:6
.40
15:6
.40
15:6
1.30
15:6
.90
9
.80
9
.40
18:9
.08
N/A
1.40
6
1.40
6
1.40
6
.80
3

139

Appendix F – Barcode Summary Data

Font
U/u
v
z
Z/z
W1C/W1c
W1D/W1d
W1F/W1f
W1I
W1J
W1k
W1G/W1g
W1R
W1T
W1Z/W1z

203 DPI Resolutions
Height
Ratio/
(inches)
Module Size
1.00
N/A
.5
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
.40
2
.40
2
N/A
2
.5
5:2
1.40
2
.40
6:2
N/A
N/A

300 DPI Resolutions
Height
Ratio/
(inches)
Module Size
1.00
N/A
.5
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
.40
4
.40
4
N/A
3
.5
7:3
1.40
4
.40
9:4
N/A
N/A

400 DPI Resolutions
Height
Ratio/
(inches)
Module Size
1.00
N/A
.5
2
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
.40
4
.40
4
N/A
4
.5
9:4
1.40
4
.40
12:4
N/A
N/A

600 DPI Resolutions
Height
Ratio/
(inches)
Module Size
1.00
N/A
.5
3
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
.40
6
.40
6
N/A
6
.5
14:6
1.40
6
.40
18:6
N/A
N/A

Table F-2: Bar Code Default Data (continued)
þ Note:

140

Some bar codes will be sensitive to Label Command ‘D’ (set dot width and height size), see Label Formatting Commands for details.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix

Bar Code Details
Unless noted, all bar codes shown here were produced using the ratio/module values of 00 and height
fields of 000 to cause the printer to produce symbols using default bar widths and height fields. See
Appendix F for the default values.

A: Code 3 of 9
Valid Characters: 0-9, A-Z, - . * $ / + % and the space character.
Variable Length.
Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.
The following example prints a code 3 of 9 bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:
L
D11
1A00000001501000123456789
121100000000100Barcode A
E

B: UPC-A
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 12 digits. If the user provides 11 digits, the printer will compute the checksum. If the user
provides the checksum, the printer will check that it matches the expected checksum. If it does not
match, the printer will print out all zeros and the expected checksum. See Appendix P.
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars
are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width).
The following example prints a UPC-A bar code:
L
D11
1B000000015010001234567890
121100000000100Barcode B
E

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

141

Appendix G – Barcode Details

C: UPC-E
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: Seven digits. If the user provides six digits, the printer will compute the checksum. If the user
provides the checksum, the printer will check that it matches the expected checksum. If it does not
match, the printer will print out all zeros and the expected checksum.
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars
are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width).
The following example prints a UPC-E bar code:
L
D11
1C0000000150100012345
121100000000100Barcode C
E

D: Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)
Valid Characters: 0-9
Variable Length.
Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.
The following example prints an Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:
L
D11
1D000000015010001234567890
121100000000100Barcode D
E

E: Code 128
Valid Characters: The entire 128 ASCII character set.
Variable Length
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars
are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times the narrow bar width, 3 times the narrow bar width, and 4 times
the narrow bar width).
This printer supports the Code 128 subsets A, B, and C. The printer can be selected to start on any
code subset and switch to another within the data stream. The default code subset is B, otherwise the
first character (A, B, C) of the data field determines the subset. Subset switching is only performed in
response to code switch command. These commands are placed in the data to be encoded at
appropriate locations, see Table G-1.

142

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix G – Barcode Details

Subset A: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters plus the control
and special characters. To select Code 128 Subset A, place an ASCII A (DEC 65, HEX 41) before the
data to be encoded.
Subset B: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters plus the
lowercase alphabetic and special characters. To select Code 128 Subset B, place an ASCII B (DEC
66, HEX 42) before the data to be encoded. If no start character is sent for the Code 128 font, Code
128 Subset B will be selected by default.
Subset C: Includes the set of 100 digit pairs from 00 through 99 inclusive, as well as special
characters. Code 128 Subset C is used for double density encoding of numeric data. To select Code
128 Subset C, place an ASCII C (DEC 67, HEX 43) before the data to be encoded. Subset C can only
encode an even number of numeric characters. When the data to be encoded includes an odd number
of numeric characters, the last character causes the printer to automatically generate a ‘switch to
subset B’ and encode the last character appropriately in subset B.
þ Note: It is recommended to use a B as the first character to prevent an A or C from changing the subset.

Special Character Handling: Characters with an ASCII value greater than 95 are considered special
characters. To access these values, a two-character reference table is built into the printer, see table
below. As an example, to encode FNC2 into a Code 128 Subset A bar code, send the ASCII & (DEC
38, HEX 26) followed by an ASCII B (DEC 66, HEX 41). Code FNC2 will be encoded.
Example: ATEST&B123 Data Encoded: TEST123
ASCII
2 CHAR
CODE A
96
&A
FNC3
97
&B
FNC2
98
&C
SHIFT
99
&D
CODEC
100
&E
CODEB
101
&F
FNC4
102
&G
FNC1

CODE B
FNC3
FNC2
SHIFT
CODEC
FNC4
CODEA
FNC1

CODE C
-NA-NA-NA-NACODEB
CODEA
FNC1

Table G-1: Special Character Handling
Control Codes: Control character encoding into Code 128 Subset A by sending these control codes:
`
a through z
{
|
}
~
ASCII 127

=
=
=
=
=
=
=

NUL
1 - 26
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US

The following example prints a Code 128 bar code:
L
D11
1E000000015010001234567890
121100000000100Barcode E

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

143

Appendix G – Barcode Details

E

F: EAN-13
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 13 digits. If the user provides 12 digits, the printer will compute the checksum. If the user
provides the checksum, the printer will check that it matches the expected checksum. If it does not
match, the printer will print all zeros and the expected checksum. See Appendix P.
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars
are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width).
The following example prints an EAN-13 bar code:
L
D11
1F0000000150100012345678901
121100000000100Barcode F
E

G: EAN-8
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 8 digits. If the user provides 7 digits, the printer will compute the checksum. If the user
provides the checksum, the printer will check that it matches the expected checksum. If it does not
match, the printer will print all zeros and the expected checksum.
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars
are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width).
The following example prints an EAN-8 bar code:
L
D11
1G00000001501000123456
121100000000100Barcode G
E

144

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix G – Barcode Details

H: Health Industry Bar Code (HBIC) (Code 39 bar code with a modulo 43 checksum)
Valid Characters: 0-9, A-Z, -$ /. %
Variable Length.
Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.
The host must supply leading “+”’s
The following example prints a HBIC bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:
L
D11
1H0000000150050+0123456789
121100000000100Barcode H
E

I: Codabar
Valid Characters: 0-9, A-D, -, ., $, :, /, + (comma is not valid).
Variable Length but requires at least three characters.
Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.
Valid Codabar symbols require start and stop characters (A–D). These characters should be placed in
the data field along with other data to be included in the symbol.
The following example prints a Codabar bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:
L
D11
1I63040001501000A1234567890D
121100000000100Barcode I
E

Barcode I

J: Interleaved 2 of 5 with a modulo 10 checksum.
Valid Characters: 0-9
Variable Length.
Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.
The following example prints an Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code with a modulo 10 checksum added and
with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:
L
D11
1J000000015010001234567890
121100000000100Barcode J
E

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

145

Appendix G – Barcode Details

K: Plessey
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 1 to 14 digits
Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.
If a + character is the last data character, an additional MSI checksum will be added to the bar code in
place of the + character.
The following example prints a Plessey bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:
L
D11
1K000000015010001234567890
121100000000100Barcode K
E

L: Interleaved 2 of 5 with a modulo 10 checksum and shipping bearer bars.
Valid Characters: 0-9
Variable Length: For the bearer bars to be printed, 14 characters are required.
Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.
The following example prints an Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code with a modulo 10 checksum with a wide
to narrow bar ratio of 3:1 and bearer bars:
L
D11
1L00000001501000123456789012
121100000000100Barcode L
E

M: 2-digit UPC addendum
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 2 digits.
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars
are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width). Human readable
characters for this bar code symbology are printed above the symbol.
The following example prints a 2 digit UPC bar code addendum:

146

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix G – Barcode Details

L
D11
1M000000015010042
121100000000100Barcode M
E

N: 5-digit UPC addendum
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 5 digits.
Valid bar widths: The width multiplier is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars are a ratio
of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width). Human readable characters for
this bar code symbology are printed above the symbol.
The following example prints a 5 digit UPC bar code addendum:
L
D11
1N000000015010001234
121100000000100Barcode N
E

O: Code 93
Valid Characters: 0-9, A-Z, -.$/+% and the space character.
Variable Length.
Valid bar widths: The width multiplier is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars are a ratio
of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width).
The following example prints a Code 93 bar code:
L

D11
1O0000000150100Datamax42
121100000000100Barcode O
E

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

147

Appendix G – Barcode Details

p: Postnet
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 5, 9 or 11 digits
Valid bar widths: The width and height multiplier values of 00 will produce a valid Postnet symbol.
Usage: The bar code height field is ignored since the symbol height is United States Postal Service
specific. This bar code is to display the zip code on a letter or package for the US Postal Service.
The following example prints a Postnet bar code:
L
D11
1p000000015010032569
121100000000100Barcode p
E

Q: UCC/EAN Code 128
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 19 digits.
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars
are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width). Human readable
characters for this bar code symbology are printed above the symbol.
The printer spreads a weighted module 103 check sum.
The following example prints a UCC/EAN Code 128 bar code:
L
D11
1Q00000001501000123456789012345678
121100000000100Barcode Q
E

148

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix G – Barcode Details

R: UCC/EAN Code128 K-MART NON EDI
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 18 digits
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars
are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width). Human readable
characters for this bar code symbology are printed above the symbol. (See W1R for an alternate.)
This bar code is set up according to K-MART specifications.
The following example prints a KMART bar code.
L
D11
1R0000000150100012345678901234567
121100000000100Barcode R
E

S: UCC/EAN Code 128 Random Weight
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: At least 34 digits.
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars
are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width).
This bar code is commonly used by the food and grocery industry.
The following example prints a UCC/EAN Code 128 Random Weight bar code:
L
D11
1S000000015005001100736750292601193042032020018002110123456
121100000000100Barcode S
E

Barcode S

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

149

Appendix G – Barcode Details

T: Telepen
Valid Characters: All 128 ASCII characters.
Variable Length
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of the record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other
bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width).
The following example prints a Telepen bar code:
L
D11
1T0000000150100ABCDEF
121100000000100Barcode T
E

Barcode T

u: UPS MaxiCode (Modes 2&3)
The printer supports MaxiCode as defined in the AIM Technical Specification. The following
examples illustrate various label format record message syntaxes for encoding data as MaxiCode. In
the following examples, special formatting is used to denote special ASCII characters as shown:
Symbol
R
S
G
S
E
OT

Hexadecimal Value
1E
1D
04

Printer message syntax allows for EOT to be substituted with
 or the use of both EOT and .

UPS Modes 2 & 3 Explicit
The data stream can force Mode 2 or 3 encoding by placing #2 or #3, respectively, before the data,
as shown in the example below. If this is not specified, the printer chooses the best mode.
1u0000001200120#3[)>RS01GS96123456GS068GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS0
89GSGS1/1GS10.1GSYGSGSGSUTRSEOT
This example will print encoding the MaxiCode symbol in Mode 3.
L
D11

1u0000001200120#3[)>RS01GS96123456GS068GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS0
89GSGS1/1GS10.1GSYGSGSGSUTRSEOT
121100000000100Barcode u
E

150

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix G – Barcode Details

Where:
#3
[)>RS01GS96
123456
068
001
G
S1Z1...
...TRSEOT

Forces Mode 3 encoding
Message Header
Maximum 9 alphanumeric ASCII, postal code
Country Code
Class

Primary Message

Secondary Message

UPS 3.0 Examples
In the UPS 3.0 protocol examples that follow, Primary Message control characters GS will not be
encoded in the MaxiCode symbol. All characters, the Secondary Message, with the exception of the
leading GS, in are encoded.
An example of the UPS 3.0 zip + 4 with Message data format and message header:
1u0000001200120[)>RS01GS96841706672GS840GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS0
89GSGS1/1GS10.1GSYGSGSGSUTRSEOT
Where:
[)>RS01GS96
841706672
840
001
G
S1Z1...
...TRSEOT

Message Header
Maximum 9 alphanumeric ASCII, postal code
Country Code
Class

Primary Message

Secondary Message

An example of the UPS 3.0 international postal “V6C3E2” with Message data format and message
header:
1u0000001200120[)>RS01GS96V6C3E2GS068GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS089G
G
G
G
G G G
R E
S S1/1 S10.1 SY S S SUT S OT
Where:
[)>RS01GS96
V6C3E2
068
001
G
S1Z1...

Message Header
Maximum 6 alphanumeric ASCII, international zip code
Country Code
Class

Primary Message

Secondary
Message

...TRSEOT

An example of the UPS 3.0 international zip “V6C3E2” without Message data format and message
header:
1u0000001200120V6C3E2GS068GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS089GSGS1/1GS10.1
G
G G G
R E
SY S S SUT S OT

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

151

Appendix G – Barcode Details

Where:
V6C3E2
068
001
G
S1Z1...
...TRSEOT

Maximum 6 alphanumeric ASCII, international zip code
Country Code
Class

Primary Message

Secondary Message

An example of the UPS 3.0 zip + 4 “32707-3270” without Message data format and message header:
1u0000001200120327073270GS068GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS089GSGS1/1GS1
0.1GSYGSGSGSUTRSEOT
Where:
32707
3270
068
001
G
S1Z1...
...TRSEOT

5 digit ASCII, Zip code
4 digit ASCII, +4 Zip code (not required)
Country Code
Class

Primary Message

Secondary Message

U: UPS MaxiCode (Modes 2&3) with Byte Count Specifier
Specified Length – The upper case U identifies a UPS MaxiCode bar code with a 4-digit string length
specifier. This allows values 0x00 through 0xFF to be included within the data strings without
conflicting with the DPL format record terminators. The four-digit decimal data byte count
immediately follows the 4-digit column position field. This value includes all of the data following
the byte count field, but does not include itself.
L
D11
1U00000010001000051327895555840666this package<0x0D>is going to
Datamax
121100000000100Barcode U
E
From the example above, the bar code’s data stream,
1U00000010001000051327895555840666this
package<0x0D>is going to Datamax, now includes a Byte Count
Specifier (the portion in bold), where 0051 equals the four-digit decimal data
byte count and includes all bytes that follow until the end of the bar code
data. Field termination is set by the byte count. , , and <0x0D>
all represent single byte values of hexadecimal 02, 0D, and 0D, respectively.
The UPS MaxiCode bar code produced encodes “327895555840666this
packageis going to Datamax”, and prints a line of text: Barcode U.

152

Barcode U

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix G – Barcode Details

v: FIM
Valid Characters: A, B, C, or D
Length: 1 character
Valid bar widths: The width and height multiplier works the same as for fonts on this bar code.
This bar code is used to display the Facing Identification Mark (FIM) that is carried on certain types
of letter mail for the U S Postal Service:
FIM A: Courtesy reply mail with Postnet.
FIM B: Business reply, penalty or franked mail without Postnet.
FIM C: Business reply, penalty or franked mail with Postnet.
FIM D: OCR readable mail without Postnet (typically for envelopes with a courtesy reply window).
The following example prints an FIM A bar code:
L
D11
1v0000000150100A
121100000000100Barcode v
E

z : PDF-417
Valid Characters: All ASCII characters.
Variable Length – This two dimensional bar code holds large amounts of data in a small area, while
providing a high level of redundancy and error checking, if specified.
L
D11
1z0000000150100F1000000PDF417
121100000000100Barcode z
E

Barcode z

The example above prints a normal, security level one, PDF-417 bar code with a 1:2 aspect ratio and
best-fit rows and columns. The (bolded) bar code’s data stream
1z0000000150100F1000000PDF417 decodes as follows:

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

153

Appendix G – Barcode Details

Example Data
Explanation
F
1-character specifying a normal or truncated bar code (T to truncate, F for normal).
1
1-digit security level ranging from 0 to 8.
00
2-digit aspect ratio specified as a fraction, with the first digit being the numerator
and the second digit the denominator. Use “00” for the default ratio of 1:2. Valid
range is from “00” to “99.”
00
2-digit number specifying the number of rows requested. Use “00” to let the printer
find the best fit. Valid range is from “03” to “90”. Row values less than 3 are set to
3, while row values greater than 90 are set to 90.
00
2-digit number specifying the number of columns requested. Use “00” to let the
printer find the best fit. Valid range is from “01” to “30”. Column values greater
than 30 are set to 30.
PDF417
The data stream to be encoded.

Terminates the data stream.
þ Note:

Format Record header fields c and d should both be zero.

Z: PDF-417 with Byte Count Specifier
Specified Length – The upper case Z identifies a PDF-417 bar code with a string 4-digit length
specifier. This allows values 0x00 through 0xFF to be used within the data strings without conflicting
with the DPL format record terminators. The four-digit decimal data byte count immediately follows
the 4-digit column position field. This value includes all of the data following the byte count field, but
does not include itself.
L
D11
1Z00000001501000015F1000000pdf<0x0D>417
121100000000100Barcode Z
E

Barcode Z

From the example above, the bar code’s data stream,
1Z00000001501000015F1000000pdf417, now includes a Byte Count Specifier (the
portion in bold), where 0015 equals the four-digit decimal data byte count and includes all bytes that
follow until the end of the bar code data. Field termination is set by the byte count. , ,
and <0x0D> all represent single byte values of hexadecimal 02, 0D, and 0D, respectively. The PDF417 bar code produced encodes “pdf417”, and prints a line of text: Barcode Z.

154

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix G – Barcode Details

W1c: DataMatrix
Valid Characters: Any 8-bit byte data
Variable Length
DataMatrix is a two-dimensional matrix symbology, which is comprised of square modules arranged
within a perimeter finder pattern. There are two basic types: ECC 000-140 and ECC 200.
ECC 000 - 140 symbols:
These square symbols can be any odd sizes from 9x9 to 49x49, which may be specified in fields iii,
and jjj. If an ECC 000-140 symbol is specified with even numbers of rows or columns, the next
largest odd value will be used. Input values greater than 49 or less than 9 will cause the symbol to be
automatically sized for the input character stream. The record format is shown here, expanded with
spaces.
a W b[b] c d eee ffff gggg hhh i jjj kkk ll...l
Where:
Field
a
W
b[b]
c
d
eee
ffff
gggg
hhh

i

Valid Inputs
1,2,3, and 4
W
c, 1c

Meaning

Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Selects DataMatrix the Bar code - the two differing values have no
other significance.
1 to 9 and A to O
Module size horizontal multiplier
1 to 9 and A to O
Module size vertical multiplier
000 to 999
No Effect; Must be numeric
0000 to 9999
Label position, row
0000 to 9999
Label position, column
000, 050, 080, 100, A 3-digit convolutional error correction level.
140
If any number other than one of these options is entered then the
nearest lesser value from the valid entries is used.
Example: Selecting an ECC value of 099 will cause the actual
ECC value of 080 to be used.
1 digit format identification:
0 - Automatically choose the encodation scheme based on the
characters to be encoded.
1 - Numeric data.
2 - Upper-case alphabetic.
3 - Upper-case alphanumeric and punctuation characters
(period, comma, hyphen, and slash).
4 - Upper-case alphanumeric.
5 - ASCII, the full 128 ASCII character set.
6 - Any 8-bit byte.

0-6

If a format identifier is selected which will not encode the input
character stream then the bar code symbol will not be printed.
It is recommended to use the auto-encodation format identification
since it will select the best possible encodation scheme for the
input stream.
Table G-2: DataMatrix ECC 000 – 140 Record Structure

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

155

Appendix G – Barcode Details

ECC 200 symbols:
There are 24 square symbol sizes available, with both row and column dimensions, which may be
specified in fields iii, and jjj, measured in modules as indicated in the following list - 10, 12, 14, 16,
18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 32, 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 64, 72, 80, 88, 96, 104, 120, 132, and 144. If an ECC 200
symbol is specified with odd numbers of rows or columns, the next largest even value will be used.
Input values greater than 144 or less than 10 will cause the symbol to be automatically sized for the
input character stream. The record format is shown here, expanded with spaces.
a W b[b] c d eee ffff gggg hhh i jjj kkk ll...l
Where:
Field

Meaning
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Selects DataMatrix the Bar code - the two differing values have no
other significance.
c
1 to 9 and A to O
module size horizontal multiplier
d
1 to 9 and A to O
module size vertical multiplier
eee
000 to 999
No Effect; Must be numeric
ffff
0000 to 9999
label position, row
gggg
0000 to 9999
label position, column
hhh
200
ECC 200 uses Reed-Solomon error correction.
i
0
Fixed value, not used
jjj
10, 12, 14, 16, 18, A 3 digit even number (or 000) of rows requested.
20, 22, 24, 26, 32,
000 causes rows to be automatically determined. The symbol will
36, 40, 44, 48, 52,
be sized to a square if the rows and columns do not match by
64, 72, 80, 88, 96,
taking the larger of the two values.
104, 120, 132, 144
kkk
10, 12, 14, 16, 18, A 3 digit even number (or 000) of columns requested.
20, 22, 24, 26, 32,
000 causes columns to be automatically determined. The symbol
36, 40, 44, 48, 52,
will be sized to a square if the rows and columns do not match by
64, 72, 80, 88, 96,
taking the larger of the two values.
104, 120, 132, 144
ll...l 8-bit data
Data to be encoded in the symbol
a
W
b[b]

Valid Inputs
1,2,3, and 4
W
c, 1c

Table G-3: DataMatrix ECC 200 Record Structure
Example:
L
D11
1W1c44000010001002000000000DATAMAX
121100000000100Barcode W1c
E

156

Barcode W1c

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix G – Barcode Details

W1C: DataMatrix with Byte Count Specifier
Specified Length – The upper case C identifies a DataMatrix bar code with a string 4-digit length
specifier. This allows values 0x00 through 0xFF to be included within the data strings without
conflicting with the DPL format record terminators. The four-digit decimal data byte count
immediately follows the four-digit column position field. This value includes all of the data following
the byte count field, but does not include itself.
L
D11
1W1C440000100010000292000000000Datamax<0x0D>prints best
121100000000100Barcode W1C
E
From the example above, the bar code’s data stream,
1W1C440000100010000292000000000
Datamax<0x0D>prints best, includes a Byte Count Specifier (the
portion in bold), where 0029 equals the four-digit decimal data byte count
and includes all bytes that follow until the end of the bar code data. Field
termination is set by the byte count. , , and <0x0D> all
represent single byte values of hexadecimal 02, 0D, and 0D, respectively.
The DataMatrix bar code produced encodes “Datamaxprints best”,
and prints a line of text: Barcode W1C.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Barcode W1C

157

Appendix G – Barcode Details

W1d / W1D: QR Code
Valid Characters: Numeric Data, Alphanumeric Data, 8-bit byte data, and Kanji characters
Variable Length: The two-dimensional bar code (as documented in AIM, Version 7.0).
Syntax: a W1 b c d eee ffff gggg hh…h
Where:
Field
a
W1
b

Valid Inputs
1,2,3 and 4
W1
D and d

Meaning
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Selects the QR bar code formatting mode, where:
D = Manual formatting. Allows the data string (hh…h)
to be entered with a comma (,) as a field separator;
fields are optional per QR Code specifications,
and the first field indicates Model 1 or Model 2
QR Code (Model 2 is the default).

c

1 to 9 and A to O

d
eee
ffff
gggg
hh…h

1 to 9 and A to O
000 to 999
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
Valid ASCII character
string, followed by (a)
termination
character(s).

d = Automatic formatting. Allows the data string
(hh…h) to be data only.
Module size horizontal multiplier Each cell in the bar code is
square, therefore ‘c’ and ‘d’ must be equal. Depending on the
conversion mode (n or m), each unit indicates a
cell dimension of .01 inch or .1 mm.
Module size vertical multiplier. (See explanation for ‘c’, above.)
No effect; must be numeric
Label position, row
Label position, column (see Appendix J)
QR Code data string (see Generation Structure, below).

Generation Structure
The data input structure (hh…h) is as follows:
Auto Format (W1d)
With bar code identifier ‘d’, the data begins after the last character of the column position field,
and does not include any command characters. The data string is terminated with a termination
character, usually a 0x0d hex that occurs twice in succession. The bar code symbol will have the
following characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Model 2
Error Correction Code Level = ‘M’ (Standard Reliability Level)
Mask Selection = Automatic
Data Input Mode = Automatic [1]

Example:

158

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix G – Barcode Details

L
D11
1W1d4400000100010This is the data portion
121100000000100Barcode W1D
E

[3]

(Two termination
characters
required.)

Manual Formatting (W1D)
With bar code identifier ‘D’, minor changes allow flexibility for data entry. (Spaces have been
added for readability.)
[q,] [e [m] i,]

cdata cdata cdata…cdata term

[2]

Where:
q
e

Field

Valid Inputs
1, 2
H, Q, M, L

m

0 – 8, none

I

A, a, M, m

cdata

N, A, B, K
immediately followed
by data

term

,  [3]

[1]
[2]
[3]

Meaning
QR Code Model number, optional. Model 2 is the default.
Error Correction Level (Reed-Solomon) – Four levels
allowing recovery of the symbol codewords:
H
= Ultra Reliability Level (30%)
Q
= High Reliability Level (25%)
M
= Standard Reliability Level (15%)
L
= High Density Level (7%)
Mask Number, optional:
None = Automatic Selection
0-7 = Mask 0 to Mask 7
8
= No Mask
Data Input Mode:
A
= Automatic setting, ASCII [1]
a
= Automatic, hex-ASCII [1]
M
= Manual Setting, ASCII[2]
m
= manual, hex-ASCII[2]
Character Mode:
N = Numeric, N data
A = Alphanumeric, A data
B = Binary , Bnnnn data (where nnnn = data bytecount, 4 decimal digits; byte-count /2 for hexASCII
K = Kanji, K data
The data string is terminated with a termination character,
generally a 0x0d hex, but can be changed by the operator. If
the Data Input Mode is Automatic, the data string is
terminated with two successive termination characters.

When Data Input Mode = Automatic – Kanji data cannot be used; Manual data input is required.
When using manual formatting commas are required between format fields and data types.
 represents the line termination character as defined by the current control code set or after use of
Txx, line field terminator label format command.

If HEX/ASCII mode is selected in manual Data Input Mode, only the data for Kanji or Binary
data types will be converted, therefore the other data types and all command characters must be
entered in ASCII format. If HEX/ASCII is selected in automatic Data Input Mode, all of the data
must be entered in HEX/ASCII format.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

159

Appendix G – Barcode Details

Data Append Mode String Format, Manual Formatting – Bar Code W1D
D aa tt pp I
Where:
Field
D
aa
tt
pp
e
m
i
cdata

term

Valid Inputs
D
00, 99

H, Q, M, L
0 – 8, none
A, a, M, m
N, A, B, K
immediately
followed by data
, 

Meaning
Data Append Mode String Format indicator
QR Code Number in Append Series, 2 decimal digits
Total number of QR Codes in series, 2 decimal digits
Value of Parity, 2 digits, 8 LSBs of data parity
As above
As above
As above
As above

As above

Characteristics
Models:
Model 1 (original version), bar code versions 1 through 14
A. ECC Levels ‘H’, ‘M’, ‘Q’, and ‘L’
B. Mask Selection Automatic or 0 through 8
C. Data Input Modes Automatic and Manual
D. Data Append Mode
Model 2 (enhanced version), bar code versions 1 through 40
A. ECC Levels ‘H’, ‘M’, ‘Q’, and ‘L’
B. Mask Selection Automatic or 0 through 8
C. Data Input Modes Automatic and Manual
D. Data Append Mode
Representation of data:
Dark Cell = Binary 1
Light Cell = Binary 0
Symbol Size (not including quiet zone, 4 cells on each of the 4 sides):
Model 1: 21 X 21 cells to 73 X 73 cells (Versions 1 to 14, increase in steps of 4 cells per side)
Model 2: 21 X 21 cells to 177 X 177 cells (Versions 1 to 40, increase in steps of 4 cells per side)
Data Characters per symbol (maximum for symbol size):
Numeric Data
Model 1; Version 14; ECC = L: 1,167 characters
Model 2; Version 40; ECC = L: 7,089 characters

160

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix G – Barcode Details

Alphanumeric Data
Model 1; Version 14; ECC = L: 707 characters
Model 2; Version 40; ECC = L: 4,296 characters
Binary Data
Model 1; Version 14; ECC = L: 486 characters
Model 2; Version 40; ECC = L: 2,953 characters
Kanji Data
Model 1; Version 14; ECC = L: 299 characters
Model 2; Version 40; ECC = L: 1,817 characters
Code Type: Matrix
Orientation Independence: Yes
Example
L
D11
1W1D44000001000102HM,AThis is the data portion also
with binary,B0003<0xfe><0xca><0x83><0x0D>
121100000000100Barcode W1D
E
Barcode W1D

Where:
QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.1 inch square, positioned at X =. 1” and Y = .1”, ECC=H, Mask =
Automatic, Data Input Mode = Manual.
Other examples:
DPL field record, QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.04 inch square, positioned at X = .1” and Y =
.1”, ECC = H, Mask = 3, Data Input Mode = Manual:
1W1D4400000100010H3M,AThis is the data portion also with
binary,B0003<0xfe><0xca><0x83><0x0D>
DPL field record, QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.08 inch square, positioned at X = .1” and Y =
.1”, ECC = L, Mask = Automatic, Data Input Mode = Manual - Kanji:
1W1D88000001000102,LM,K<0x81><0x40><0x81><0x41><0x81><0x42><0x0
D>
DPL field record, QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.04 inch square, positioned at X = .1” and Y =
.1”, ECC = L, Mask = Automatic, Data Input Mode = Manual - Kanji (in Hex/ASCII format):
1W1D4400000100010L8m,K814081418142<0x0D>
DPL field record, QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.01 inch square, positioned at X = .1” and Y =
.1”, ECC = M, Mask = Automatic, Data Input Mode = Automatic:
1W1d1100000100010Pallet 35FGA, Box 55367, Datamax Corp,
Orlando, Florida 32707<0x0D><0x0D>

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

161

Appendix G – Barcode Details

W1f / W1F:

Aztec

Valid Characters: All ASCII characters, depending upon the selected options.
Variable Length (W1f): This two dimensional bar code holds a large amount of data in a small area
and can provide a high level of error checking.
Specified Length (W1F): With a string four-digit length specifier, values 0x00 through 0xFF to be
included within the data strings without conflicting with the DPL format record terminators.
Syntax: a W1 b c d eee ffff gggg [hhhh] i jjj kk…k
Where:
Field
a
W1
b

Valid Inputs
1,2,3, and 4
W1
f and F

c

0 to 9 and A to O

d

0 to 9 and A to O

eee
ffff
gggg
[hhhh]

000
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999

i

0, 1

jjj

000 to 300

kk…k

8-bit data,
followed by a
termination
character

Meaning
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Lowercase selects the Aztec bar code, variable length
Uppercase selects the Aztec bar code with a Byte Count Specifier
Module size horizontal multiplier, 0 = default size. The c/d module
size parameters should be equal to produce a square symbol. When the
label command (Dwh) is used to generate larger text, then c and d may
be used to compensate and ensure a square symbol.
Module size vertical multiplier, 0 = default size (See explanation for
‘c’, above.)
No Effect
Label position, row
Label position, column
Optional string length specifier. Field termination is set by this byte
count. This decimal value includes all of the data following this byte
count field, but does not include itself.
Extended Channel Interpretation (ECI) mode; 0 = Disabled,
1 = Enabled
Error Correction (EC) / Amount (see table below), where:
000 – Default EC, approximately 23%
001 – 099 EC fixed value, expressed as a percent.
101 – 104 Compact core, 1 to 4 layers respectively.
201 – 232 Full size core, 1 to 32 layers respectively.
300 – Rune format, encodes three ASCII decimal digits 0-256;
scanner decode output is decimal number 0-256
Data to be encoded.

The error correction or size selection determines the symbol size and other characteristics of the
symbol, as shown in the following table. Attempting to encode more data that has been made
available will result in no symbol printed.

162

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix G – Barcode Details

jjj

Error Correction (EC) / Size Implications
Maximum[2]
Maximum[2]
Symbol
Symbol
Binary Data
Alphabetic
Size[1]
Format
Bytes
Characters

Maximum[2]
Numeric
Characters

000
001 to 099

variable
variable

data dependant
data and EC
dependant

1914
1914

3067
3067

3832
3832

101
102
102
103
104

15
19
19
23
27

compact
compact
compact
compact
compact

6
19
19
33
53

12
33
33
57
89

13
40
40
70
110

201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232

19
23
27
31
37
41
45
49
53
57
61
67
71
75
79
83
87
91
95
101
105
109
113
117
121
125
131
135
139
143
147
151

full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size
full size

8
24
40
62
87
114
145
179
214
256
298
343
394
446
502
559
621
687
753
824
898
976
1056
1138
1224
1314
1407
1501
1600
1702
1806
1914

15
40
68
104
144
187
236
291
348
414
482
554
636
718
808
900
998
1104
1210
1324
1442
1566
1694
1826
1963
2107
2256
2407
2565
2728
2894
3067

18
49
84
128
178
232
294
362
433
516
601
691
793
896
1008
1123
1246
1378
1511
1653
1801
1956
2116
2281
2452
2632
2818
3007
3205
3409
3616
3832

300

11

Rune

1

1

1

[1]

Measured in module size x, assuming default module size (cd=00).
[2]
Maximum sizes are approximate and data dependant, and may be less than indicated.

Table G-4: Aztec Characteristics Index

Error Correction
Size 001 to 099: This value specifies the percent of symbol code words to be used for error
correction. Actual error correction word percentage will vary depending on data. The default value,
approximately 23%, is recommended. Any other value may be selected to meet the user’s needs.
Some minimum-security codeword may be generated depending on the data sent for encoding,

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

163

Appendix G – Barcode Details

particularly when the volume of that data is small. It the data capacity is exceeded no symbol is
printed.
Size 101 to 104: Values 101 through 104 result in 1 through 4 layers (two modules thick)
respectively, around the center finder pattern. Data volume constraints apply as indicated in the table
above. Symbols will be of the compact form. All available codeword will be used for error correction.
It the data capacity is exceeded no symbol is printed.
Size 201 to 232: Values 201 through 232 result in 1 through 32 layers (two modules thick)
respectively, around the center finder pattern. Data volume constraints apply as indicated in the table
above. Symbols will be of the full-size form. All available codewords will be used for error
correction. It the data capacity is exceeded no symbol is printed.
Size 300: Value 300 informs the printer that the data, which follows will be used to encode one
RUNE symbol. The data consists of one to three ASCII digits with value range of 0 to 256. The data
may include leading zeros. Data streams longer than three digits or data that includes non-numeric
characters may have unpredictable results.
Extended Channel Interpretation Mode: A value of 1 provides for extended channel codewords to
be inserted into the bar code symbol, using escape sequences in the datastream. This mode also
provides for effective Code 128 and UCC/EAN 128 emulations, when used in with appropriately
configured bar code readers. The valid values for escape sequences are of the form n, where:
 – 1 byte with value 2710 = 1B16
n – 1 ASCII digit, range 0 through 6
These escape sequences are encoded as FLG(n) character pairs described in the International
Symbology Specification – Aztec Code, AIM, 1997-11-05, and the meanings of the values for n are
the same in both.
0 – Is encoded as FLG(0), and interpreted as FNC1 or  depending on its
location in the data stream. The printer does not validate 0 locations
in the data stream.
When 0 is the leading data in the stream, it is interpreted as a FNC1 as used in
the Code 128 symbology, and specifically for UCC/EAN 128 applications. For
appropriately configured scanners this will be interpreted/transmitted as a ]C1
symbology identifier preamble. The printer does not validate UCC/EAN 128 data
syntax.
When 0 follows a single alphabetic or two numeric characters respectively,
then it also interpreted as a FNC1. For appropriately configured scanners this would
be interpreted/transmitted as a ]C2 symbology identifier preamble, and the alpha or
numeric characters preceding the FNC1 are Application Indicators assigned by AIM
International. The printer does not check AI validity.
When 0 is anywhere else in the data stream, a  replaces it in the bar code
symbol, as with UCC/EAN 128 field separators.

164

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix G – Barcode Details

n –

Is encoded as FLG(n), and is interpreted as signaling Extended Channel
Interpretation. When the value of n is from 1 to 6, it signals that the following n
digits comprise an extended channel identifier for use with ECI compliant bar code
scanners. An erroneous bar code symbol may result from failing to follow n
with n digits. Any 0 following n and not within the n digits will be
encoded as FLG(0). In the context of a FLG(n), any backslash ‘\’ (9210) will be
interpreted by the scanner as two backslashes ‘\\’.

Example 1: The variable length example encodes “AZTEC” with no ECI input, and 23% error
correction, and prints the bar code. A line of text is also printed.
L
D11
1W1f00000001501000000AZTEC
121100000000100Barcode W1f
E

Barcode W1f

Example 2: The specified length example includes a byte count field for all bytes that follow until the
end of the bar code data. The byte count is 17. The symbology encodes
“AZTECbarcode”, and prints the bar code. Notice that a  does not terminate
the bar code format record. A line of text is also printed.
L
D11
1W1F000000015010000170000AZTEC<0x0D>barcode
121100000000100Barcode W1F
E
Barcode W1F

Functions Not Supported
• Structured Append
• Reader Initialization Symbol Generation
• Module shaving

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

165

Appendix G – Barcode Details

W1g / W1G:

USD-8 (Code 11)

Valid Characters: 0-9,Bar Code Data String Length: Variable, typical max 41 characters
Non-Human Readable: W1g
Human Readable:
W1G
USD-8 (Code 11) is a bar code which encodes the ten digits and the dash (-) character. An additional
character serves as the start and stop indicator. Each character has three bars and two spaces for a
total of five elements. Of these five elements, two are of medium width and three are narrow, except
for the “0”, “9”, and “-“ characters, which have only one wide element and four narrow elements.
The narrow bar size is specified in DPL by the narrow bar parameter, the medium is specified in DPL
by the wide bar parameter and the wide bar is fixed at 2 times the medium bar minus the narrow bar.
DPL calculates two checksum characters, C and K, and automatically places them prior to the stop
character. The following example prints a Code11 bar code:

L
D11
1W1G00000015001500123456789-
121100000000100Barcode W1G
E
Barcode W1G

W1I: EAN128 with Auto Subset Switching
Valid characters: The entire 128 ASCII character set.
Variable length, minimum 4 characters
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars
are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times the narrow bar width, 3 times the narrow bar width, and 4 times
the narrow bar width).
This printer supports the Code 128 subsets A, B, and C. If the data begins with at least four numeric
characters the default start code is subset C. If there is a non-numeric in the first four characters then
the default start code is subset B. The next character after start is always FNC1. Subset switching
between B and C is performed based on rules as below:
1. If in subset C and there are an odd number of numeric digits, subset B will be set prior to the last
digit.
2. If four or more numeric digits appear consecutively while in subset B, the character code C will be
set prior to the digits.
3. When in subset C and a non-numeric occurs subset B will be inserted prior to the character.
Note that there is no auto-switching from or to Subset A. Standard switches are still used (see table
below).

166

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix G – Barcode Details

Subset A: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters plus the control
and special characters.
Subset B: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters plus the
lowercase alphabetic and special characters.
Subset C: Includes the set of 100 digit pairs from 00 through 99 inclusive, as well as special
characters. EAN128 Subset C is used for double density encoding of numeric data.
Special Character Handling: Characters with an ASCII value greater than 95 are considered special
characters. To access these values, a two-character reference table is built into the printer, see table
below. As an example, to encode FNC2 into an EAN128 Subset A bar code, send the ASCII & (DEC
38, HEX 26) followed by an ASCII B (DEC 66, HEX 41). Code FNC2 will be encoded.
ASCII
96
97
98
99
100
101
102

2 CHAR
&A
&B
&C
&D
&E
&F
&G

CODE A
FNC3
FNC2
SHIFT
CODEC
CODEB
FNC4
FNC1

CODE B
FNC3
FNC2
SHIFT
-NAFNC4
CODEA
FNC1

CODE C
-NA-NA-NA-NA-NACODEA
FNC1

Table G-8: Special Character Handling

Control Codes: Control character encoding into Code 128 Subset A by sending these control codes:
`
a through z
{
|
}
~
ASCII 127

=
=
=
=
=
=
=

NUL
1 - 26
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US

The following example prints an EAN128 bar code:
L
D11
1W1I000000025002512345&G10Z2133021AK
121100000000100Barcode W1I
E
Barcode W1I

When scanned this bar code will decode as:
[C][FNC1]1234[B]5[F1]10Z[C]213302[B]1AK(81)

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

167

Appendix G – Barcode Details

W1J: Code 128 with Auto Subset Switching
Valid characters: The entire 128 ASCII character set.
Variable length
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars
are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times the narrow bar width, 3 times the narrow bar width, and 4 times
the narrow bar width).
This printer supports the Code 128 subsets A, B, and C. If the data begins with at least four numeric
characters the default start code is subset C. If there is a non-numeric in the first four characters or
there are less than four then the default start code is subset B. Subset switching between B and C is
performed based on rules as below:
1. If in subset C and there are an odd number of numeric digits, subset B will be set prior to the last
digit.
2. If four or more numeric digits appear consecutively while in subset B, the character code C will
be set prior to the digits. If there is an odd number of numerics and already in B the first numeric
will be placed in B with the others in C.
3. When in subset C and a non-numeric occurs subset B will be inserted prior to the character.
Note there is no auto switching from or to subset A. Standard switches are still used. See table below.
Subset A: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters plus the control
and special characters.
Subset B: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters plus the
lowercase alphabetic and special characters.
Subset C: Includes the set of 100 digit pairs from 00 through 99 inclusive, as well as special
characters. Code128 Subset C is used for double density encoding of numeric data.
Special Character Handling: Characters with an ASCII value greater than 95 are considered special
characters. To access these values, a two-character reference table is built into the printer, see table
below. As an example, to encode FNC2 into a Code128 Subset A bar code, send the ASCII & (DEC
38, HEX 26) followed by an ASCII B (DEC 66, HEX 41). Code FNC2 will be encoded.
ASCII
96
97
98
99
100
101
102

2 CHAR
&A
&B
&C
&D
&E
&F
&G

CODE A
FNC3
FNC2
SHIFT
CODEC
CODEB
FNC4
FNC1

CODE B
FNC3
FNC2
SHIFT
-NAFNC4
CODEA
FNC1

CODE C
-NA-NA-NA-NA-NACODEA
FNC1

Table G-9: Special Character Handling

168

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix G – Barcode Details

Control Codes: Control character encoding into Code 128 Subset A by sending these control codes:
`
a through z
{
|
}
~
ASCII 127

=
=
=
=
=
=
=

NUL
1 - 26
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US

The following example prints a Code128 Auto bar code:

L
D11
1W1J000000025002512345&G10Z2133021AK
121100000000100Barcode W1J
E
Barcode W1J

When scanned this bar code will decode as:
[C]1234[B]5[F1]10Z2 [C]133021[B]AK(95)

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

169

Appendix G – Barcode Details

W1k: Reduced Space Symbology (RSS)
Valid Characters: Type dependant
Bar Code Data String Length: Type dependant
RSS is a continuous, linear bar code symbology used for identification in EAN.UCC systems. There
are six different types:
RSS Type
RSS-14
RSS-14 Truncated
RSS-14 Stacked
RSS-14 Stacked Omni-Directional

RSS Limited

RSS Expanded

•

Overview*
Encodes a full 14-digit EAN.UCC item identification
within a linear symbol that can be scanned omnidirectionally.

•

The encodable character set is 0 through 9.

•

The maximum numeric data capacity is the application
identifier plus 14-digit numeric item identification.

•

Error detection is mod 79 checksum.

•

Encodes a 14-digit EAN.UCC item identification with
indicator digits of zero or one within a linear symbol.

•

The encodable character set is 0 through 9.

•

The maximum numeric data capacity for is the application
identifier plus 14-digit numeric item identification.

•

Data must begin with indicator 0 or 1. Any higher number
results in discarded data.

•

Error detection is mod 89 checksum.

•

Encodes EAN.UCC item identification plus
supplementary AI element strings.

•

The encodable character is a subset of ISO 646, consisting
of upper and lower case letters, digits and 20 selected
punctuation characters, plus the special function character
FNC1, (#).

•

The maximum numeric data capacity is 74 numeric or 41
alphanumeric.

•

Error detection is mod 211 checksum.

*Additional data can be encoded in a two-dimensional composite as per specification. (See AIM Spec ITS/99001 “International Symbology Specification - Reduced Space Symbology” for more details.)

Syntax for RSS-14, RSS-14 Truncated, RSS-14 Stacked, RSS-14 Stacked Omni-Directional and RSS
Limited (spaces shown for readability):
a W1 k c d eee ffff gggg h

i j m n…n | p…p

Where:

170

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix G – Barcode Details

a
W1
k
c
d
eee
ffff
gggg
h

Field

Valid Inputs
1,2,3, and 4
W1
k
0 to 9 and A to O
0 to 9 and A to O
000
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
R, T, S, D, L

i
j
m
n…n
|

1-9
0 to (i-1)
0 to (i-1)
0 to 9
| (optional)

p…p

2-D data (optional)

[1]

[2]

Meaning
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Selects RSS bar code
Wide bar ratio, default = 2
Narrow bar ratio, default = 2
No effect
Label position, row
Label position, column
RSS Type: R = RSS-14,
T = RSS Truncated,
S = RSS Stacked,
D = RSS Omni-Directional,
L = RSS Limited
Pixel Multiplier
X pixels to undercut
Y pixels to undercut
Numeric linear data, length 13 [1]
Vertical bar separates primary linear data and secondary
2-D data
Additional 2-D data [2]

The application identifier is not encoded in the symbol nor is the last check digit; the user should enter in a
13-digit value. The decoding system will display the application identifier and calculate the check digit.
The separator row height for two-dimensional composite is fixed at one times the pixel multiplier.

Table G-5: RSS-14, RSS-14 Truncated, RSS-14 Stacked, RSS-14 Stacked Omni-Directional and
RSS Limited Record Structures

Examples:
The following example prints an RSS-14 bar code.
L
D11
1W1k0000001500150R1002001234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k
E

Barcode W1k

The following example prints an RSS-14 bar code with 2-D data.
L
D11
1W1k0000001500150R1002001234567890|123456-99/99/99
121100000000100Barcode W1k
E

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Barcode W1k

171

Appendix G – Barcode Details

The following example prints an RSS-14 Truncated bar code.
Barcode W1k

L
D11
1W1k0000001500150T1002001234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k
E

The following example prints an RSS-14 Stacked bar code.
Barcode W1k

L
D11
1W1k0000001500150S1002001234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k
E

The following example prints an RSS-14 Stacked Omni-Directional bar
code.
L
D11
1W1k0000001500150D1002001234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k
E

Barcode W1k

The following example prints an RSS-14 Limited bar code.
L
D11
1W1k0000001500150L1001501234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k
E

172

Barcode W1k

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix G – Barcode Details

Syntax for the RSS Expanded bar code (spaces shown for readability):
a W1 k c d eee ffff gggg h
Where:
Field
a
W1
k
c
d
eee
ffff
gggg
h
i
j
m
nn
p…p
|
q…q
[1]
[2]

Valid Inputs
1,2,3, and 4
W1
k
0 to 9 and A to O
0 to 9 and A to O
000
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
E
1-9
0 to (i-1)
0 to (i-1)
2-22, even only[2]
0 to 9
| (optional)
2-D data (optional)

i j m nn p…p | q…q

Meaning
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Selects RSS bar code
Wide bar ratio, default = 2
Narrow bar ratio, default = 2
No effect
Label position, row
Label position, column
RSS Type: E= RSS Expanded
Pixel Multiplier
X pixels to undercut
Y pixels to undercut
Segments per row
Subset of ISO646, including alphanumerics
Vertical bar separates primary linear data and secondary 2-D data
Additional 2-D data [1]

The separator row height for two-dimensional composite is fixed at one times the pixel multiplier.
When using additional 2-D composite data, the sequence width must be at least 4.

Table G-6: RSS-14 Expanded Record Structure
Example:
The following example prints an RSS-14 Expanded bar code.
L
D11
1W1k0000001500150E100022001234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k
E
Barcode W1k

W1R: UCC/EAN Code 128 K-MART NON EDI
Valid Characters: 0-9
Length: 18 digits
Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars
are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, or 4 times the narrow bar width). Human readable
characters for this bar code symbology are printed above the symbol.
This bar code produces the same symbology as bar code ID “R”, except that the human readable field
has been modified to print on the bottom of the bar code (see below).

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

173

Appendix G – Barcode Details

The following example prints a KMART bar code:
L
D11
1W1R0000000150100012345678901234567
121100000000100Barcode W1R
E
34 567890 123 4567
Barcode W1R

W1t: TCIF Linked Bar Code 3 of 9 (TLC39)
Valid Characters: All ASCII characters.
Variable Length: Encodes a 25-character alphanumeric serial number in MicroPDF417 symbol.
Specified Length: Encodes a six-digit sequence in a standard 3 of 9 bar code (code 39) followed by a
link flag character in code 3 of 9.
Syntax: a W1 t c d eee ffff gggg hhhhhh ; ii…i
Where:
Field
a
W1
t
c

Valid Inputs
1,2,3, and 4
W1
t
0 to 9 and A to O

d
eee
ffff
gggg
hhhhhh
;

0 to 9 and A to O
001 to 999
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
ECI Data
Fixed

i…i

S/N Data

Meaning
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Selects TLC39 bar code
Wide bar of Code 39, ratio of wide to narrow must be between 2:1
and 3:1
Narrow bar of Code 39
Height of Code 39
Label position, row
Label position, column
Six digit ECI number
Parses data. (If the seventh character is not a semi colon then only a
six-digit code 39 will print.)
Up to 25 alphanumeric serial number characters to be encoded in
the MicroPDF417 symbol. This symbol is fixed at four columns.
The number of rows is determined by the amount of data, as
follows:
Number of Alphanumeric Characters

Number of Rows

1-14
15-22
23-25

4
6
8

The link flag is the character “T” in code 39 without a start/stop indicator. The location of this flag is
based on the ECI code location, length and height. The location of the MicroPDF417 symbol is based
on the location of ECI bar code. The symbol’s module width and height are fixed at the default. The
following example prints a TLC39 bar code:

174

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix G – Barcode Details

L
D11
1Wt0000001500150123456;ABCD12345678901234
1911A0801300170A1B2C3DAAA
121100000000100Barcode W1t
E

Barcode W1t

W1z: MicroPDF417
Valid Characters: All ASCII characters, depending on the selected options.
Variable Length
Syntax: a W z c d eee ffff gggg h i j k 0 m…m
Where:
a
W1
z
c
d
eee
ffff
gggg
h
i
j
k
0

Field

Valid Inputs
1,2,3, and 4
W1
z
0 to 9 and A to O
0 to 9 and A to O
000
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
1 to 4
0 to 9 and A
0, 1
0, 1
0

m…m

8-bit data

Meaning
Rotation
Fixed value, extended bar code set
Selects the MicroPDF417 bar code
Module size horizontal multiplier, 0 – default size
Module size vertical multiplier, 0 – default size
No Effect
Label position, row
Label position, column
Number columns
Row / Error Correction index
Byte Compaction Mode (1), best compression for binary data
Macro Character Substitution Disable (1)
Fixed ASCII digit 0.
Reserved for future use.
Data to be encoded

This is a 2 dimensional bar code capable of holding large amounts of data in a small area. It provides
a high level of redundancy and error checking. Please reference the following specifications for
details: International Symbol Specification – MicroPDF417, AIM International Technical
Specification, version 1.0 1998-06-18; International Symbol Specification Code 128, AIM
International Technical Specification, version 1.0 1999-11-4; UCC/EAN-128 Application Identifier
Standard, Uniform Code Council, Inc, January 1993, revised July 1995; Application Standard for
Shipping Container Codes, Uniform Code Council, 1996. The following example prints a
MicroPDF417 bar code, default module size (cd = 00), with 1 column, 24 rows, error correction of
33%, no byte compaction, macro character substitution enabled.
L
D11
1W1z000000015010014000PDF417
121100000000100Barcode W1z
E
Barcode W1z

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

175

Appendix G – Barcode Details

The number of columns (h) and the row / error correction index (i) combine to form a
row/column/error correction selection index (hi) which determines other characteristics of the symbol
as shown in the following table.
Row/Column/Error Correction Selection Index (h, i) Implications
hi Columns Rows Maximum
Symbol Symbol
Maximum
Maximum
Maximum
Width[2] Height[3] Binary Data
Errors
Alphabetic
Numeric
Corrected[1]
Bytes[4]
Characters[5] Characters[5]
10
1
11
4
40
24
3
6
8
11
1
14
4
40
30
7
12
17
12
1
17
4
40
36
10
18
26
13
1
20
5
40
42
13
22
32
14
1
24
5
40
50
18
30
44
15
1
28
5
40
58
22
38
55
20
2
8
5
57
18
8
14
20
21
2
11
6
57
24
14
24
35
22
2
14
6
57
30
21
36
52
23
2
17
7
57
36
27
46
67
24
2
20
8
57
42
33
56
82
25
2
23
10
57
48
38
67
93
26
2
26
12
57
54
43
72
105
30
3
6
9
84
14
6
10
14
31
3
8
11
84
18
10
18
26
32
3
10
13
84
22
15
26
38
33
3
12
15
84
26
20
34
49
34
3
15
18
84
32
27
46
67
35
3
20
23
84
42
39
66
96
36
3
26
29
84
54
54
90
132
37
3
32
35
84
66
68
114
167
38
3
38
41
84
78
82
138
202
39
3
44
47
84
90
97
162
237
40
4
4
5
101
10
8
14
20
41
4
6
9
101
14
13
22
32
42
4
8
11
101
18
20
34
49
43
4
10
13
101
22
27
46
67
44
4
12
15
101
26
34
58
85
45
4
15
18
101
32
45
76
111
46
4
20
23
101
42
63
106
155
47
4
26
29
101
54
85
142
208
48
4
32
35
101
66
106
178
261
49
4
38
41
101
78
128
214
313
4A
4
44
47
101
90
150
250
366
[1]
Can be any combination of 1∗erasures + 2∗substitutions (e.g. 13 maximum number of errors corrected might
include 7 erasures and 3 substitutions).
[2]
Includes 1 module width of quiet zone on either side.
[3]
Assumes the module height is 2∗module width, and includes one module width quiet zones on top and
bottom.
[4]
Assumes Binary Compaction.
[5]
Assumes Text Compaction.

Table G-7: MicroPDF417 Characteristics Index
þ Note: In the table above, row/column/error correction selection index (hi) values increasingly large do not
necessarily result in the ability to encode more data.

176

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix G – Barcode Details

Byte Compaction Mode (j = 1)
A value of 1 forces Byte Compaction. The compaction ratio is six 8-bit bytes of data compressed into
a 5-symbol codeword. See the table above for the maximum data allowed for any row/column/error
correction selection index (hi).
Macro Character Substitution Disable (k=1)
By default Macro Character Substitution is enabled (k=0). When enabled, Byte Compaction has
priority over Macro Character Substitution. When Macro Character Substitution is enabled, the data
stream header and trailer are compacted when they conform to the following forms:
[)>RS05GS data RS EoT
or
[)>RS06GS

data RS EoT

where:
data may not contain adjacent bytes with values RS or

G
S

( RS = 3010 , 1E16 and GS = 2910 , 1D16 and EoT = 410 ,416)
Functions Not Supported
•
•
•
•

General Purpose Extended Channel Interpretations, including Code-128 emulations
Structured Append
Reader Initialization Symbol Generation
Module shaving

W1Z: Micro PDF417 with Byte Count Specifier
Specified Length – The upper case Z identifies a Micro PDF417 bar code with a 4-digit string length
specifier. This allows values 0x00 through 0xFF to be included within the data strings without
conflicting with the DPL format record terminators. The four-digit decimal data byte count
immediately follows the four-digit column position field. This value includes all of the data following
the byte count field, but does not include itself.
L
D11
1W1Z0000000150100001214000pdf<0x0D>417
121100000000100Barcode W1Z
E
Barcode W1Z

From the example, the bar code’s data stream,
1W1Z0000000150100001214000PDF<0x0D>417, includes a Byte Count Specifier (the
portion in bold), where 0012 equals the four-digit decimal data byte count and includes all bytes that
follow until the end of the bar code data. Field termination is set by the byte count. , ,
and <0x0D> all represent single byte values of hexadecimal 02, 0D, and 0D, respectively. The Micro
PDF417 bar code produced encodes “pdf417”, and prints a line of text: Barcode W1Z.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

177

Appendix G – Barcode Details

178

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix

Font Mapping - Single and Double Byte Characters
Label format records with font code 9 in the b field of the Format Record header can specify any of the
following bit-mapped or scalable fonts with the associated specification in the font size/selection (eee
height) field, as shown in the tables on the following pages.
Example: 1911u4000100010A0215134
The example above will produce a printed string consisting of the two Kanji characters referenced by the
two HEX ASCII pairs A0, 21, and 51, 34, on appropriately equipped printers.
Example: 1911U4001000100P012P012<0x38><0x77><0x00>
The above example will produce a printed string consisting of the one 12 point Kanji character referenced
by the byte pair with hex values 38 and 77 on appropriately equipped printers.
þ Note: Double byte hex representation character strings terminate with two null bytes and a , i.e., 0x 00
00 0D. The Hex-ASCII representation is terminated with .

The alphanumeric portion (nn) of the scalable font specifiers, Snn, Unn, unn, numbering system is a base
62 numbering system, 0, 1, 2…8, 9, A, B, C...X, Y, Z, a, b, c...x, y, z. For scalable fonts the S designation
signifies single byte characters and U designates double byte. The lower case U counterpart signifies that
print data in the label format record is in a hex-ASCII format. Fonts that have been downloaded with
designators of the form nn, where nn are alphanumeric, as seen in the font size specifier (eee height)
column below, may be referenced in label format records by their upper or lower case specifiers as
available. However, fonts created for double-byte access cannot be accessed using Snn as the font
designator, and vice versa, single-byte fonts cannot be accessed using Unn or unn.
þ Note: Downloading scalable fonts require specifying the font ID, a two character alphanumeric. The S, or U, u
used in referencing the font within label format records is not used in the download specification.
Attempting to utilize a scalable font with an inappropriate byte-size designation (e.g. S on double byte or
U, u on single byte) will have unpredictable results.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

179

Appendix H – Font Mapping

Font 9, Font Specifications (eee Height) and Associated Characteristics
Font
Character
Font Size Specifier
Point
Name
Mapping
(eee Height)
Size
Font 9 Bit-Mapped Resident Fonts (E-Class and M-4206, only)
CG Triumvirate[1]
Single Byte
000 - 010
5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 18, 24, 30,
36, 48, respectively
CG Triumvirate[1]
Single Byte
A04, A05, A06, A08, A10, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 18, 24,
A12, A14, A18, A24, A30, 30, 36, 48, 72, respectively
A36, A48, A72
Font 9 Bit-Mapped Downloaded Fonts
User downloaded
Single Byte
100 - 999
user defined
bit-mapped typeface
Font 9 Scalable Resident Fonts Specifications (not available for E-Class and M-4206 )
CG Triumvirate
Single Byte
S00
scalable
Bold Condensed
Scalable[1]
CG Triumvirate[1]
Single Byte
S01
scalable
Scalable
Font 9 Scalable Resident Fonts Specifications (optional)
CG Times
Single Byte
SA0
scalable
Scalable
CG Times Italic
Single Byte
SA1
scalable
Scalable
CG Times Bold
Single Byte
SA2
scalable
Scalable
CG Times Bold
Single Byte
SA3
scalable
Italic
Scalable
Gothic B Kanji
Double Byte (Binary)
U40
scalable
Scalable
Gothic B Kanji
Double Byte (Hex ASCII)
u40
scalable
Scalable
GB Simplified
Double Byte (Binary)
UC0
scalable
Chinese Scalable
GB Simplified
Double Byte (Hex ASCII)
uC0
scalable
Chinese Scalable
Korean Hangul
Double Byte (Binary)
UH0
scalable
Scalable
Korean Hangul
Double Byte (Hex ASCII)
uH0
scalable
Scalable
Font 9 Scalable Downloaded Fonts
User downloaded
Single Byte (Binary)
S50 - S5z...
scalable
Scalable typeface
S90 - S9z
User downloaded
Double Byte (Binary)
U50...,U5z...,...U90...,
scalable
Scalable typeface
U9z
User downloaded
Double Byte (Hex ASCII)
u50...,u5z...,...u90...,
scalable
Scalable typeface
u9z
[1]
Standard internal fonts

Table H-1: Font 9 Specifications

180

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix

Symbol Sets and Character Maps
Symbol Set Selection
Scalable fonts are mapped through a symbol set sometimes referred to as a ‘code page’. This mapping
allows the host application to select a variety of characters to match the application. For example in the
code page (CP), character code 0xE4 causes character Φ to be printed. In CP E7, the character code 0xE4
causes δ to be printed. Each of the CPs allows the host application to “emulate” a character set for their
application. Datamax printers that support scalable fonts contain either a standard or an enhanced group
of CPs as defined below. The CP (symbol set) is selected using a DPL Command, ySxx, where
xx is the two letter CP Identifier.
þ Note: Not all fonts have an entire compliment of character codes for a given code page (symbol set).

Code Page Identifier
Datamax
HP (PCL)
AR
8V
CP
3R
D1
11L
D2
12L
D3
13L
DN
0D
DS
10L
DT
7J
E1
0N
E2
2N
E5
5N
E6
6N
E7
12N
E9[3]
9N
EG
12N
EH
7H
ER
10N
FR
1F
G8
8G
GK
12G
GR
1G
H0
0H
H8
8H
IT
0I
LS[3]
14L
LG
1U
M8
8M
MC
12J

Intellifont [1]
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√

Single Byte Code Pages
Font Format
TrueType
MicroType [2]
√
√ [3]
√
√ [3]

√

√

√
√
√
√
√

√
√
√
√
√
√
√ [4]
√ [3]
√ [3]
√ [3]
√
√ [3]
√ [3]
√
√ [3]
√ [3]
√
√
√
√
√ [4]

√ [4]
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√ [4]

Description
Arabic-8
PC Cyrillic
ITC Zapf Dingbats/100
ITC Zapf Dingbats/200
ITC Zapf Dingbats/300
ISO 60 Danish / Norwegian
PS ITC Zapf Dingbats
DeskTop
ISO 8859/1 Latin 1
ISO 8859/2 Latin 2
ISO 8859/9 Latin 5
ISO 8859/10 Latin 6
ISO 8859/7 Latin/Greek
ISO 8859/15 Latin 9
ISO 8859/7 Latin/Greek
ISO 8859/8 Latin/Hebrew
ISO 8859/5 Latin/Cyrillic
ISO 69: French
Greek-8
PC-8 Greek
ISO 21: German
Hebrew-7
Hebrew-8
ISO 15: Italian
HP4000 ITC Zapf Dingbats
Legal
Math-8
Macintosh

181

Appendix I – Symbol Sets and Character Maps

Code Page Identifier
Datamax
HP (PCL)
MS
5M
P9[3]
13U
PB
6J
PC
10U
PD
11U
PE
17U
PG
10G
PH
15H
PI
15U
PM
12U
PR
10V
PT
9T
PU
9J
PV
26U
PX
12U
PY
3Y
R8
8U
R9[3]
4U
SP
2S
SW
0S
SY
19M
TK
8T
TS
10J
UK
1E
US
0U
VI
13J
VM
6M
VU
14J
W1[4]
19U
WA
9V
WD
579L
WE[4]
9E
[4]
WG
9G
WL[4]
19L
WN
9U
WO
9U
WR[4]
9R
WT[4]
5T

Intellifont [1]
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√

Single Byte Code Pages
Font Format
TrueType
MicroType [2]
√ [4]
√ [4]
[4]
√
√ [4]
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√ [3]
√
√ [3]
√
√
√ [4]
√ [4]
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√

√
√ [4]
√
√
√

√ [3]
√
√ [4]
√
√
√

√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√

√
√
√
√
√ [3]
√
√
√ [3]
√
√
√ [3]
√

√ [4]
√
√

√ [4]
√ [3]
√

Description
PS Math
PC-858 Multilingual
Microsoft Publishing
PC-8, Code Page 437
PC-8 D/N, Code Page 437N
PC-852 Latin 2
PC-851 Latin/Greek
PC-862 Latin/Hebrew
Pi Font
PC-850 Multilingual
PC-864 Latin/Arabic
PC-8 TK, Code Page 437T
PC-1004
PC-775 Baltic
PTXT3000
Non-UGL, Generic Pi Font
Roman-8
Roman-9
ISO 17: Spanish
ISO 11: Swedish
Symbol
Turkish-8
PS Text
ISO 4: United Kingdom
ISO 6: ASCII
Ventura International
Ventura Math
Ventura US
Windows 3.1 Latin 1
Windows Latin/Arabic
Wingdings
Windows 3.1 Latin 2
Windows Latin/Greek
Windows 3.1 Baltic (Latv, Lith)
Windows
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
Windows Latin/Cyrillic
Windows 3.1 Latin 5

[1]

Supported in the E-Class and M-4206 models.
Supported in the A-Class, I-Class, W-Class, M-4208 and M-4306 models.
[3]
Not supported in the E-Class models.
[4]
Contains the Euro currency symbol ( ).

[2]

Table I-1: Single Byte Code Pages

182

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix I – Symbol Sets and Character Maps

Double-Byte Symbols, Chinese, Kanji and Korean
Character Map Selection
Double byte scalable fonts are mapped through a ‘character map’. This mapping allows the host
application to select a variety of characters to match the application. Each of the code pages allows the
host application to emulate a character set for the application.
Double Byte Character Map
Character Map ID TrueType Font
Description
B5
BIG 5 (Taiwan) Encoded
√
EU
EUC (Extended UNIX Code)
√
GB
Government Bureau Industry Standard; Chinese (PRC) ; default
√
JS
JIS (Japanese Industry Standard); default
√
SJ
Shift JIS
√
UC
Unicode (including Korean)
√
Table I-2: Double Byte Character Map
The double-byte symbol set is selected using yUxx command. The single-byte symbol set is
selected using the same command, ySxx. Each affects an independent database selection and has
no impact on the other.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

183

Appendix I – Symbol Sets and Character Maps

184

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix

The General Purpose Input Output (GPIO) Port
If GPIO equipped, printers can easily be programmed to interface with most applicator devices. There are
three different configurations of the GPIO Card. The GPIO functions are enabled and configured using
the menu system of the printer, or via Kc Commands. These parameters are stored in non-volatile
memory and saved for subsequent power-ups.
Printing with GPIO: When the GPIO is enabled, the printer will not print a label unless the Start of Print
signal is active. When a label is ready to print and the printer is waiting for the Start of Print signal the
printer will display “WAITING FOR SIGNAL”.

GPIO Configuration (M-Class)
The connection to the GPIO signals is accessed via the option port connector on the front of the printer or
the J6 connector on the Main PCB (51-2355-01). The printer requires firmware version 5.07 or greater.
The option port connector is an 8-pin Molex Microfit 3.0 P/N 44300-800. The J6 connector is an AMP
connector P/N 640456-8. Each of the GPIO pin functions is detailed below:
Options Port Connector

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Main PCB Connector J6

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

185

Appendix J – GPIO

Pin
#
1
2

Signal
Name
Vcc
Printer
Fault

3
4

Spare
Start of
Print
(SOP)

M-Class GPIO Port Connections and Functions
Signal
Signal
Signal
Direction[1]
State
Description
+5 VDC
Output
Printer +5 VDC
Low
Output
Goes low if the printer detects any fault. Applicable
only if cutter not equipped. To activate set the GPIO
Option to “YES” and Cutter Equipped to “NO” [2] .
Reserved
Input
N/A
Input
For applicators, it is recommended to only set the SOP
Low
signal to ACTIVE LOW. When ready to print a label,
Level
the applicator should set this signal low for at least
50ms or until the EOP signal goes not active. (See
sample circuit next page.) To activate set the
PRESENT SENSOR Option to “YES” [2].
þ Note: If a label is ready to print, the printer will blink the
STOP LED, signifying “WAITING FOR SIGNAL,” until it
receives the applicator’s Start of Print signal.

5

6
7
8
[1]
[2]

End of
Print
(EOP)
Signal
Ground
+24V
Signal
Ground

Low
Level

Output

Ground

N/A

Goes low when printed label reaches the presented
position. Minimum signal time 20msecs. To activate
set GPIO Option to “YES” [2].
N/A

1.6 Amp
(fused )
Ground

Input

N/A

N/A

N/A

Signal direction given relative to the printer.
Selection for this option can be set via the Printer Set Configuration Command Kc or the Printer Setup
Function. The Printer Set Configuration Parameter Mnemonics are “PS” for Present Sensor (N, Y, A [Auto]);
“CE” for Cutter Equipped (N, Y, A [Auto]) and “GE” for GPIO (N, Y or A [Applicator]). The Printer Setup
selections are as follows: Item #3, PRESENT SENSOR; Item #4, CUTTER EQUIPPED; and Item #25, GPIO.

M-Class Start of Print Control
Vcc

Connections for an external Start of Print control can be made (1)
directly to Pin 4 using a TTL-level input or (2) with an interface
circuit similar to the one shown here (for additional interfacing data,
see the table above).

186

1
1K

SOP 4
Gnd 8

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix J – GPIO

GPIO-1 Configuration (I-Class & W-Class)
The GPIO-1 interface connector is a 9-pin Mini-DIN female type (e.g., Kycon KMDG-9S-BS) requiring a
9-pin Mini-DIN plug (e.g., Kycon KMDA-9P). Each GPIO-1 pin function is detailed in the table below:
Pin
#
1
2
3
4
5

Signal
Name
Vcc
Ribbon Fault
Paper Fault
Printer Fault
Ribbon Low

I&W-Class GPIO-1
Signal
Signal
Direction*
State
+5 VDC
Output
Low
Output
Low
Output
Low
Output
Programmable
Output

6

End of Print

Programmable

Output

7

Backup Label

Programmable

Input

Start of Print Signal Programmable
Signal Ground
Ground

Input
N/A

8
9

Pin Functions
Signal
Description
Printer +5 VDC
Goes low when the printer detects ribbon out.
Goes low when the printer detects media out.
Goes low when any printer fault is detected.
Will signal Applicator when the ribbon supply
is low.
Will signal Applicator when print is done. Can
be monitored to initiate next Start of Print
sequence.
When active, will back up the label once it has
been presented. (i.e., must have a present
distance greater than zero)
When active, will begin print.
N/A

*Signal direction is given relative to the printer.

GPIO-1 Pin Configuration (as viewed from the rear of the printer):

I&W-Class GPIO-1 Start of Print Control
Connections for an external Start of Print/Backup Label
control can be made (1) directly to Pin 8 / 7 using a TTL-level
input or (2) with an interface circuit similar to the one shown
right. For additional interfacing requirements, see the table
above.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

187

Appendix J – GPIO

GPIO-2 Configuration (A-Class)
The A-Class GPIO-2 (Applicator Interface Card) has two LEDs, an Auxiliary (Serial B) Port, and a GPIO
Port.

Applicator Interface Card
1
2
3
4
5
Connector
Pin-Outs

6
7
8

Auxiliary Port, J1

9
Green and Yellow LEDs

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

9
10

GPIO Port, J2

11
12
13
14
15

GPIO-2 Interface Card Location and Port Pin-outs

GPIO-2 Interface Card Jumper Locations

188

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix J – GPIO

The Auxiliary Port (J1) is an RS-232 interface. Serial data transfer settings, such as baud rate, word
length and parity, can be made using KcSP commands. These settings must match the device that
you are connecting. Jumpers JMP 1 – JMP 4 should be in installed.
GPIO-2 Auxiliary Data Port
Pin Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Signal
+5 VDC (0.5 Amp )
RX
TX
DTR
Ground
N/C
RTS
CTS
N/C

The GPIO Port allows convenient printer to applicator integration. Functions can be configured using the
menu system or via Kc commands. All configuration settings are saved in non-volatile memory.
Jumper settings are critical:
•

Jumper settings allow the printer to power the applicator interface circuitry, or the applicator interface
circuitry can be powered externally.

•

Jumper settings allow + 5 or +24 VDC output signal levels to be used.

The Applicator Start of Print Circuit will depend upon the applicator system’s requirements:

J2 - GPIO PORT

4 For applicator interface circuitry that
will use the printer’s +5 VDC, follow the
schematic shown right.

3 Start of Print
4

Feed Label

5 Pause Toggle
6 Reprint
1 Ground

Vcc = 5 VDC External Power Source

4 For applicator interface circuitry that
will supply an external +5 VDC and
ground, follow the schematic shown
right.

J2 -GPIO PORT
2 Vcc
3 Start of Print

For this configuration, JMP 7 and JMP 8
must be removed

4

Feed Label

5 Pause Toggle
6 Reprint
Ground

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

189

Appendix J – GPIO

The table below details the GPIO Port pin-outs, functions, and configurable settings:
Failure to configure the GPIO Port’s jumpers for the device(s) you are connecting may
WARNING result in damage to the printer and/or the applicator.
GPIO Port (J2) Pin Functions and Associated Jumper Selections
Signal
Active
Jumper
Function /
Direction
Setting
Placement
Description
Ground
Ground
JMP 8 ‘On’
Printer chassis ground is used
1
Ground (Configurable)
Open
Open
JMP 8 ‘Off’
Ground return must be supplied
Output
+5 VDC
JMP 7 ‘On’
Printer +5 VDC is used
2
+5 VDC (Configurable)
(.5 amp max.)
Open
Open
JMP 7 ‘Off’
+5 VDC must be supplied
3
Start Of Print [5]
Input
Programmable [1]
[4]
4
Feed Label
Input
Low
N/A
N/A
5
Pause Toggle
Input
Low
6
Reprint [3]
Input
Low
7
+24 VDC (1.0 amp max.)
Output
+24 VDC
8
Ground
Ground
Ground
JMP 9:
9
Ribbon Low
Output
Programmable [1]
See WARNING message,
10
Service Required [2]
Output
Low
Pins 1 & 2 =
above.
11
End Of Print
Output
Programmable [1]
+5 VDC
12
Media Out
Output
Low
When the output is inactive,
– OR –
13
Ribbon Out
Output
Low
then all output pins will be
Pins 2 & 3 =
pulled up to the voltage
14
Data Ready (DRDY)
Output
Low
+24 VDC
determined by this jumper
setting.
15
Spare
Output
N/A
N/A
N/A
[1]
For details see Section 4.2.4 of the A-Class Operator’s Manual.
[2]
Evoked by occurrences listed under ‘Fault Messages’ in Section 6.2 of the A-Class Operator’s Manual.
[3]
Reprints the last label exactly, with no increment or time stamp changes; use it for error conditions. Always keeping this signal
LOW will result in non-stop printing.
[4]
Advances media until the signal goes HIGH and, if not in continuous mode, the media will be positioned at the next available
media TOF.
[5]
If active with no current print job, “WAITING FOR DATA” is displayed. Specifying a quantity of 9999 while always keeping
this signal ‘ON’ will cause non-stop label printing, except in single label mode (see Imaging Mode, Section 4.2.5 of the AClass Operator’s Manual), which will cause the printer to stop between labels.
Pin
#

Signal
Name

The Green and Yellow Indicators offer a visual check of printer/applicator activity:
GPIO-2 Interface Indicators
• Yellow LED

Flash at power-up and when the card’s outputs change state.

• Green LED

Flash at power-up and when the card’s inputs change state.

190

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix

Print Resolutions, Module Identifiers, Maximum Field, Column, & Character Values
þ Note:

Throughout the tables below, the following standards are used:
X = Supported Command
ND = Non-Display

Module ID

Description

(Memory Bank)

A
B
C
D
G [2]
H
Y

F
Z

DRAM (512 KB - default size)
Flash (256 KB available to user) [1]
Default, as assigned by X
DRAM (512 KB - default size) configurable.
Internal DRAM (default 1MB) configurable.
512 KB Flash Main PCB, configurable.
1.5 MB Flash, configurable.
5.5 MB Optional Expanded Flash Main Logic
Card, configurable.
64 KB Flash – Menu / EFIGS – protected
128 KB Flash – 64 KB Menu / EFIGS
protected / 64 KB Flash, configurable.
4 MB Flash – Option, configurable.
4 MB Flash – Option ILPC – protected

A

X

E
X
X[3]
X

X

Printer Model
M (ND)
I
X
X
X
X
X
X

M

W

X
X
X

X
X

X
X

X

X

X

X
X

X

X

X

X
X

X
X

[1]

The availability/size of the Internal Flash Module is dependent upon the installed font option (expandable with the Flash
Memory Expansion Option) and available Flash memory; reference the Configuration Label, or following the KC
command the “INTERNAL FLASH MODULE PRESENT” message. The Flash memory has a limited number of writes
(approximately 100,000) and is intended for permanent (or semi-permanent) storage of downloaded images, fonts and label
formats.
[2]
Not available for the I-4206 and I-4208.
[3]
Not standard.

Table K-1: Printer Module Identifiers

Printer
(All models, or as noted)
A-Class
E-Class
I-Class (I-4206 and I-4208)
I-Class (I-4210, I-4212, I-4308, I-4406, and I-4604)
M-Class (M-4206)
M-Class (M-4208 and M-4306)
W-Class
[3]

Maximum
Format Fields [3]
700
450
500
700
450
700
700

Total Characters
for all Fields
32768
16,000
32768
32768
16,000
32768
32768

When the product of the number of fields and characters in each field exceeds the available printer memory (the limiting
factor), portions of the label may not print.

Table K-2: Maximum Label Format Fields & Characters

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

191

Appendix K – Print Resolutions; Module Identifiers; Maximum Field, Column & Character Values

Printer
Model
A-4212
A-4310
E-4203
E-4204
E-4304
I-4206
I-4208
I-4210
I-4212
I-4308
I-4406
I-4604
M-4206
M-4208
M-4306
W-6208
W-6308
W-8306

Print
Resolution
DPI
DPMM
203
8.0
300
11.8
203
8.0
203
8.0
300
11.8
203
8.0
203
8.0
203
8.0
203
8.0
300
11.8
406
16.0
600
23.6
203
8.0
203
8.0
300
11.8
203
8.0
300
11.8
300
11.8

Dot Dimensions
(Nominal)
Inches
.0043 x .0052
.0027 x .0043
.0043 x .0052
.0043 x .0052
.0028 x .0056
.0043 x .0052
.0043 x .0052
.0043 x .0052
.0043 x .0052
.0027 x .0043
.0013 x .0018
0008 x .0015
.0043 x .0052
.0043 x .0052
.0027 x .0043
0043 x .0052
.00027 x .0043
.00027 x .0043

Millimeters
.11 x .13
.07 x .11
.11 x .13
.11 x .13
.07 x .14
.11 x .13
.11 x .13
.11 x .13
.11 x .13
.07 x .11
.05 x .07
.03 x .06
.11 x .13
.11 x .13
.07 x .11
.109 x .132
.069 x .108
.069 x .108

Maximum
Print Width
Dots
Millimeters
832
104.1
1248
105.7
832
104.1
832
104.1
1248
105.7
832
104.1
832
104.1
832
104.1
832
104.1
1248
105.7
1664
104.1
2496
105.7
864
108.0
864
108.0
1248
105.7
1344
168.1
1920
162.6
2560
216.7

Maximum
“gggg” Value
Inch
Metric
0410
1041
0416
1057
0410
1041
0410
1041
0416
1057
0410
1041
0410
1041
0410
1041
0410
1041
0416
1046
0410
1041
0416
1057
0425
1080
0425
1080
0416
1057
0662
1681
0640
1626
0853
2167

Table K-3: Print Widths, Resolutions, and Record Column Field Values

Printer Resolution (DPI)
203
300
400
600

Row Adjust Finetune KcRF Parameter Range (+/– dots)
-100 – 100 dots
-150 – 150 dots
-200 – 200 dots
-300 – 300 dots

Table K-4: Row Adjust Range per Print Resolution

192

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix

Speed Ranges
Printer Speed Command*
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
a
b
c
d
e

Speed Value:
Inches per Second
Millimeters per Second
1.0
25
1.5
38
2.0
51
2.5
63
3.0
76
3.5
89
4.0
102
4.5
114
5.0
127
5.5
140
6.0
152
6.5
165
7.0
178
7.5
191
8.0
203
8.5
216
9.0
227
9.5
241
10.0
254
10.5
267
11.0
279
11.5
292
12.0
305
13.0
330
14.0
356
15.0
381
16.0
406
17.0
432
18.0
457
19.0
483
20.0
508

*Applicable speed values are printer dependent. See Table L-2, below.

Table L-1: Speed Command Values

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

193

Appendix L – Speed Ranges

Printer

A-4212
A-4310
E-4203[1]
E-4204
E-4304
I-4206
I-4208
I-4308
I-4210
I-4212
I-4406
I-4604
M-4206
M-4208
M-4306
W-6208
W-6308
W-8306
[1]

Print
Range
C–W
C–S
A–G
A–G
A–G
C–K
C–O
C–O
C–S
C–W
C–K
C–G
C–K
C–O
C–K
C–O
C–O
C–K

Slew
Default
O
K
G
G
G
K
O
K
K
O
I
E
G
O
G
K
K
K

Range
C–f
C–d
A–G
A–G
A–G
C–K
C–O
C–O
C–S
C–W
C–K
C–G
C–K
C–O
C–K
C–S
C–S
C–O

Backup
Range
Default
C–G
G
C–G
G
A–E
C
A–E
C
A–E
C
C–G
G
C–G
G
C–G
G
C–G
G
C–G
G
C–G
G
C–G
G
C–G
C
C–G
G
C–G
C
C–G
G
C–G
G
C–G
G

Default
O
K
G
G
G
K
O
K
K
O
K
G
G
O
G
K
K
K

Maximum speed is limited to ‘E’ unless the optional regulated power supply is attached.

Table L-2: Speed Ranges and Defaults by Model

194

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix

Commands by Function
Commands by Function
Function
Backup speed
Batch quantity request
Cancel
Character bit-mapped data
Character code
Character dump mode
Column offset amount
Configuration label and dot pattern print
Configuration Set (See Table 5-1 for listing)
Continuous paper length
Count by
Cut
Cut by
Cut by
Decrement alphanumerically
Decrement numerically
DIP switch, host controlled settings
Dot size height and width
Edge sensor enable
Feed rate
Feedback characters enable
Field data line terminator
File delete from module
Firmware version request
Font descriptor
Font ID number
Form feed
Set Present Distance
Format attribute
Graphics image download
Heat setting
Inches
Increment alphanumerically
Increment numerically
Label format field replacement
Label formatting start
Label length maximum

Command
pa
E
C
(snnnWdata
*cnnnE
P
Cnnnn
Z
Kc
cnnnn
^nn
o
:nnnn
cnn
Vn
Dwh
e
Sa
a
Tnn
xmfname
v
)snnnW
*cnnnD
F
Kfnnnn
An
Iabfnamecr
Hnn
n
>fii
+fii
Unnstring
L
Mnnnn

Table M-1: Commands (A-L)

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

195

Appendix M – Commands By Function

Commands by Function
Function

Command

Memory query
Memory query (new format)
Metric
Metric
Mirror
Module clear
Module, compress
Module, directory request
Module, set default
Module, FLASH memory Test
Module, RAM memory Test
Modules, clear all
Pause for each label
Pause toggle
Pause, controlled
Place data in global register
Print last label format
Print speed
Print time and date
Printhead dot pattern test label
Quantity labels printed
Quantity of labels
Recall global data and place in field
Recall stored label
Reflective sensor select
Replacement field tag
Reset
Resettable counters reset
Ribbon saver
Row offset amount
RS-232 port test
Scalable font download
Sensor values request
Slew rate
Status ASCII string request
Status byte request
Store label in module & terminate formatting
Symbol set select
Symbol set select
Terminate formatting - print label format
Terminate label formatting, do not print label
Time and date request
Time and date set
Update system database with current database
Zero (Ø) conversion to “0”

KQ
Kq
m
m
M
qm
zm
Wa
Xm
w
t
Q
J
B
p
G
G
Pa
Tstring
T
Ennnn
Qnnnn
Sa
rname
r
U
#
Kr
Rx
Rnnnn
k
imtaabbb...bcrxxxxxxxxfff...f
Y
Sa
A
F
smname
ySaa
ySaa
E
X
B
AwMMddyearhhmmjjj
U
z

Table M-1: Commands (M-Z)

196

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix

Class Series DPL Constraint Cross-Reference
þ Note:

Throughout the tables below, the following standards are used:
X = Supported Command
ND = Non-Display

Immediate
Command
#
*
A
B
C
D
E
F
U

Description
Reset
Reset
Send ASCII Status String
Toggle Pause
Stop/Cancel
SOH Shutdown
Send Batch Quantity
Send Status Byte
Update System Database with
Current Database

A
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

Class Printer Model
I
M – ND
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

M
X
X
X
X
X

W
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X

M
X
X
X

W
X
X
X

Table N-1: Immediate Command  Constraints
System Level
Command
A
a
B
b
C
c
D
d
E
e
F
f
G
g
H
I
i
J
k
L

Description
Set Time and Date
Enable Feedback Characters
Get Printer Time and Date Info
Set Cutter signal time
Copy Module
Set Continuous Paper Length
Memory Dump
Set Printer to Double Buffer Mode
Set Quantity for Stored Label
Select Edge Sensor
Form Feed
Set Form Stop Position
Print Last Label Format
Internal Batch Software Mode
Set Cutter Signal Time
Input Graphics Data
Download Scalable Font
Set Pause
Test RS-232 Port
Enter Label Formatting Mode

Class Printer Model
I
M – ND
X
X
X
X
X
X

A
X
X
X

E
X
X
X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

Table N-2: System Level Command  Constraints

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

197

Appendix N – DPL Consraint Cross Reference

System Level
Command
M
m
N
n
O
o
P
p
Q
q
R
r
S
s
T
t
U
V
v
W
w
X
x
Y
y
Z
z

Description
Set Maximum Label Length
Set Printer to Metric
Enter Internal Batch
Set Printer to Inches
Set Start of Print Position
Cycle Cutter
Enter Character Dump Mode
Controlled Pause
Clear All Modules
Clear Module
Ribbon Saver
Select Reflective Sensor
Set Feed Rate
Set Printer to Single Buffer Mode
Printhead Dot Pattern Test Label
Test DRAM Memory Module
Label Format Field Replacement
Software Switch Settings
Firmware Version Information
Request Module Information
Test FLASH Memory Module
Set Default Module
Delete Module File
Output Sensor Values
Select Font Symbol Set
Print Configuration and Dot Pattern
Pack Module

Class Printer Model
I
M – ND
X
X
X
X

A
X
X

E
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

M
X
X

W
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

Table N-2: System Level Command  Constraints (continued)

198

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix N – DPL Consraint Cross Reference

ExtendedSystem
Command
Kb
KC
Kc
KD
Kd
KE
KF
Kf
KI
KM
KO
KQ
Kq
KP
KR
Kr
KS
KV
KW
Kx

Description
Backfeed Time Delay
Get Configuration
Set Configuration
Database Configuration
Set File as Factory Defaults
Character Encoding
Select Factory Defaults
Set Present Distance
GPIO Input
Memory Configuration, Internal
Module
GPIO Output
Query Memory Configuration
Query Memory Configuration
(new format)
Module Protection
Reset Memory Configuration
Reset Internal Counters
Memory Configuration, Scalable
Font Cache
Verifier Enable/Disable
Memory Configuration, Printable
Label Width
Delete Configuration File

A

E

X
X

X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X

X
X
X

Class Printer Model
I
M – ND
X
X
X
X
X
X

X

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X
X

W

X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X

X

X

X
X
X

X
X

X

X
X
X
X

M

X
X

Table N-3: Extended-System Command Constraints

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

199

Appendix N – DPL Consraint Cross Reference

Label
Formatting
Command
:
+ (>)
- (<)
^
A
B
C
c
D
E
e
F
f
G
H
J
M
m
n
P
p
Q
R
r
S
s
T
U
W
X
y
Z
z
S
T

Description
Set Cut by Amount
Make Last Field Entered Increment
Numeric (Alphanumeric)
Make Last Field Entered Decrement
Numeric (Alphanumeric)
Set Cut by Amount
Set Format Attribute
Bar Code Magnification
Set Column Offset Amount
Set Cut by Amount
Set Dot Size Width and Height
Terminate Label Formatting Mode
and Print Label
Recall Printer Configuration
Advanced Font Attributes
Set Present Speed
Place Data in Global Register
Enter Heat Setting
Justification
Select Mirror Mode
Set Metric Mode
Set Inch Mode
Set Print Speed
Set Backfeed Speed
Set Quantity of Labels to Print
Set Row Offset Amount
Recall Stored Label Format
Set Slew Speed
Store Label Format in Module
Set Field Data Line Terminator
Mark Previous Field as a String
Replacement Field
Wait Mode
Terminate Label Formatting Mode
Select Font Symbol Set
Zip Mode
Zero (Ø) Conversion to “O”
Recall Global Data
Print Time and Date

Class Printer Model
I
M – ND

A

E

X
X

X
X

X
X

X

X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

M

W

X
X

X
X

X
X

X

X

X

X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X

Table N-4: Label Command Constraints

200

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix N – DPL Consraint Cross Reference

Internal
Font
9

9

9
[1]
[2]

Description
(Ann) Smooth Internal CG
Triumvirate Bitmap Font:
Referencing the Font 9 to Smooth
CG Triumvirate Fonts are
automatically converted to the CG
Triumvirate Scalable Font, when
installed. The printed scalable font
is slightly smaller than previous
printers, measuring less than 1/16
inch over three inches of print.
(S00) CG Triumvirate Bold
Condensed Scalable Font.
(Standard)
(S01) CG Triumvirate Scalable
Font. (Standard)

A
X [2]

E
X [1]

Class Printer Model
I
M – ND
X [2]
X [1]

M
X [2]

W
X [2]

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Bitmapped Fonts may or may not be used depending on installed fonts.
Scaleable Fonts are always used.

Table N-5: Internal Font Constraints

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

201

Appendix N – DPL Consraint Cross Reference

202

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix

Image Loading
The printer will accept four types of image files: .BMP, .IMG, .PCX and a special Datamax 7-bit ASCII
file (as defined in this section). Using the Datamax 7-bit ASCII format will require at least twice as much
data transmission time as the other formats, (see I). The Datamax ASCII image file format is
made up of a set of records with identical formats, each representing a dot row of the image; a terminator
follows the last of these records.
Dot-row record
•
•
•
•

Dot-row record
Terminator
Each dot-row record has the following format:
Syntax:

80nndd...d

Where:

nn

-

dd...d -

Is the number of character pairs in dd...d, represented in ASCII hex.
Is dot data, character pairs, ASCII hex, 00-FF.

Duplicate records may be encoded using a repeat data record, following the data record that needs
duplicating. The repeat data record format is:
Syntax:

0000FFnn

Where:

nn

-

Is the number of duplicates, ASCII hex, 00-FF.

The terminator, last record, at the image download is: FFFF

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

203

Appendix O – Image Loading

^BqA(CR)
^BIAAFLOGO(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFC00000007FFC0003FFFFC001FC0001FC0003FFFFC0018000FFC001FF8000C0003FFFFE000000FFFFE0001FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFC00000000FFC0003FFFFC001FC0001FC0003FFFFC0018000FFC001FF800040001FFFFE0000007FFFC0001FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFC000000003FC0001FFFFC001FC0001FC0001FFFFC0018000FFC001FF800040001FFFFE0000003FFFC0001FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFC000000000FC0001FFFFC001FE0001FE0001FFFFC00180007FC000FF800060001FFFFE0000003FFFC0003FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFE0000000007E0001FFFFC001FE0001FE0001FFFFC00180007FC000FFC00060000FFFFE0000001FFFC0003FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFE0000000003E0000FFFFC001FE0000FE0000FFFFC00180007FC0007FC00020000FFFFE0000001FFF80003FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFE0000000001E0000FFFFC001FE0000FF0000FFFFC001C0007FC0007FC00030000FFFFE0010000FFF80003FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFE0000000000F0000FFFFC001FE0000FF0000FFFFC001C0007FC0007FC00030000FFFFE00180007FF80007FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFE0000000000700007FFFC001FF0000FF80007FFFC001C0007FC0003FC000380007FFFE00180007FF80007FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF0000000000380007FFFC001FF0000FF80007FFFC001C0003FC0003FE000380007FFFE001C0003FF80007FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF0000000000380007FFFC001FF0000FF80007FFFC001C0003FC0003FE000380007FFFE001E0003FF80007FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF0000000000180003FFFC001FF00007FC0003FFFC001C0003FC0001FE0001C0003FFFE001E0001FF0000FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF00000000001C0003FFFC001FF00007FC0003FFFC001E0003FC0001FE0001C0003FFFE001F0000FF0000FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF00007C00000C0003FFFC001FF00007FE0003FFFC001E0003FC0000FF0001E0003FFFE001F0000FF0000FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF80007F80000E0001FFFC001FF80007FE0001FFFC001E0003FC0000FF0001E0001FFFE001F80007F0000FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF80007FC0000E00000000001FF80007FE00000000001E0001FC0000FF0001E00000000001FC0007F0000FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF80007FE0000600000000001FF80003FF00000000001E0001FC00007F0000F00000000001FC0003F0001FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF80003FF0000700000000001FF80003FF00000000001F0001FC00007F0000F00000000001FE0001E0001FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF80003FF0000700000000001FF80003FF00000000001F0001FC00007F8000F00000000001FE0001E0001FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFC0001FFC0003C0000000001FFE0001FFE0000000001F8000FC00000FC0007E0000000001FFE00000003FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0001FFC0001E0000000001FFE0001FFE0000000001F8000FC00000FC0007E0000000001FFF00000003FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0001FFC0001E0000000001FFE0001FFE0000000001F8000FC00000FC0007F0000000001FFF00000007FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0000FFC0001F0000000001FFE0000FFF0000000001F8000FC000007C0003F0000000001FFF80000007FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0000FFC0001F0000000001FFE0000FFF0000000001FC0007C000007E0003F0000000001FFF80000007FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0000FFE0001F0001FFC001FFE0000FFF8001FFC001FC0007C000003E0003F8000FFE001FFFC0000007FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0000FFE0000F8001FFC001FFF0000FFF8000FFC001FC0007C000003E0003F8000FFE001FFFE000000FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF0000FFE0000F8000FFC001FFF0000FFF8000FFC001FC0007C000003E0003F8000FFE001FFFE000000FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF0000FFE0000F8000FFC001FFF00007FFC000FFC001FC0007C000001F0001FC000FFE001FFFF000000FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF00007FE0000FC000FFC001FFF00007FFC0007FC001FE0007C002001F0001FC0007FE001FFFF000000FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF00007FF0000FC0007FC001FFF00007FFE0007FC001FE0003C002001F0001FE0007FE001FFFF800000FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF00007FF0000FE0007FC001FFF80007FFE0007FC001FE0003C003000F0001FE0007FE001FFFFC00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF80007FF00007E0007FC001FFF80007FFE0003FC001FE0003C003000F0001FE0003FE001FFFFC00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF80007FF00007E0003FC001FFF80003FFF0003FC001FE0003C00300078001FF0003FE001FFFFE00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF80003FF00007F0003FC001FFF80003FFF0003FC001FE0003C00380078000FF0003FE001FFFFE00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF80003FF80007F0003FC001FFF80003FFF0001FC001FF0003C00380078000FF8001FE001FFFFE00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF80003FF80007F0001FC001FFF80003FFF8001FC001FF0001C003C0038000FF8001FE001FFFFE00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFC0000000007FFC000001F80000000000FC000001FFF0000003FFE0000007FFC000001FFFC0003F80007FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFE000000000FFFC000001F80000000000FE000001FFF8000003FFE0000007FFE000001FFFC0003FC0003FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFF000000000FFFE000001F80000000000FE000001FFF8000003FFF0000007FFE000001FFFC0003FC0003FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFC00000000FFFE000001FC0000000000FE000001FFF8000003FFF0000007FFE000001FFFC0003FE0001FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFE00000000FFFE000001FC00000000007F000001FFF8000003FFF0000007FFF000001FFFC0003FE0001FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFF00000001FFFF000001FC00000000007F000001FFF8000003FFF8000007FFF000001FFF80003FF0000FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFC0000001FFFF000001FC00000000007F000001FFF8000003FFF8000003FFF800001FFF80007FF0000FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFE0000003FFFF800001FC00000000007F800001FFFC000003FFF8000003FFF800001FFF80007FF80007FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFF0000007FFFF800001FC00000000007F800001FFFC000003FFFC000003FFF800001FFF80007FF80007FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFF800000FFFFF800001FE00000000003FC00001FFFC000003FFFC000003FFFC00001FFF00007FFC0003FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFE00001FFFFFC00001FE00000000003FC00001FFFC000003FFFE000003FFFC00001FFF00007FFC0003FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFF00007FFFFFC00001FE00000000003FC00001FFFC000003FFFE000003FFFE00001FFF00007FFE0001FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFF8003FFFFFFC00001FE00000000003FE00001FFFC000003FFFF000003FFFE00001FFF00007FFE0001FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
FFFF(CR)
^BL(CR)
1Y1100000000000LOGO(CR)
E(CR)

Figure O-1: Sample Datamax 7-bit ASCII File Image

Figure O-2: Sample Label

204

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix

UPC-A and EAN-13: Variable Price/Weight Bar Codes
The EAN/UPC standard allows for an additional checksum to be generated in the middle of the bar code
based on the data. This is used when the price or weight of an item is embedded into the bar code data
(commonly used in the food industry).
For the printer to generate this checksum, a ‘V’ must be placed in the data stream in the position the
checksum is requested. If the ‘V’ is placed in the 6th position for UPC-A or the 7th position for EAN-13,
a checksum will be generated using the next five digits in the data stream. If the ‘V’ is placed in the 7th
position for UPC-A or the 8th position for EAN-13, a checksum will be generated using the next four
digits in the data stream. The checksum is generated per the EAN/UPC bar code standard.

Examples:
1B110000200020012345V01199
Prints the UPC-A bar code with the variable price checksum in the sixth position.

1B1100002000200123456V0150
Prints the UPC-A bar code with the variable price checksum in the seventh position.

1F1100002000200123456V01199
Prints the EAN-13 bar code with the variable price checksum in the seventh position.

1F11000020002001234567V0150
Prints the EAN-13 bar code with the variable price checksum in the eighth position.

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

205

Appendix P – UPC-A and EAN-13

206

Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Appendix

International Language Print Capability (ILPC) Programming Examples
ILPC, offered as a field upgrade or a factory installable option, allows the printing of non-English
character sets, available with European language support (CG TIMES), KANJI language support
(GOTHIC B and GOTHIC E [available on the E-Class and non-display M-Class printer models]), Chinese
language support (SIMPLIFIED GB) and Korean Hangul. All of the features are embedded in the printer
resident firmware and accessible through DPL thus eliminating excessive download time of bitmapped
characters. Using scalable technology licensed from AGFA, this firmware allows users to print smooth
characters in sizes from 4pt (1.4 mm) to 999pt (350 mm) in over 40 languages. Consult Appendix I for
code page selections. Specific details regarding which characters are supported in each option can be
obtained through Datamax Technical Support.
ILPC - CG TIMES Option
The CG Times Option is a single-byte scalable font consisting of four typefaces in 38 Western European
languages. This option contains over 900 unique characters in each of the four typefaces from the CG
Times typeface family, Normal, Italic, Bold, and Bold Italic. Single-byte scalable fonts are selected using
a print format record (see Generating Label Formats and Appendix H for details).
Scalable CG TIMES Font Code (‘eee’ field):
SA0 - CG TIMES
SA1 - CG TIMES ITALIC
SA2 - CG TIMES BOLD
SA3 - CG TIMES BOLD ITALIC

Sample Greek DPL file and resulting label:
<02>L
D11
ySWG
1911SA003600020P020P020(WG) Greek Characters from
1911SA003000085P020P020the internal Symbol Set,
1911SA002400085P020P020font code SA0
1911SA001500050P020P020<20>
<20> 1911SA001100100P020P020<20><20> 1911SA000700140P020P020Datamax 1X1100000100020B365190005005 Q0002 E þ Note: The notation “” in this DPL file should be interpreted by the reader as representing the hexadecimal value of the character sent to the printer. Class Series Programmer’s Manual 207 Appendix Q – ILPC Programming Examples Sample label created using the preceding data: ILPC-KANJI Option The Kanji Option is a double byte scalable font supporting Kanji Gothic B (or Gothic E on E-Class and non-display M-Class printers). In the double byte format, the printer recalls one character printed from every two 8-bit bytes sent from the host. Double byte scalable fonts are selected using a print format record (see Generating Label Formats and Appendix H for details). eee (Font Code) U40 u40 UK1 uK1 u50 u5z… u90 - u9z U50 U5z... U90 - U9z þ Note: Scalable Double-Byte Font Map - KANJI Scalable Binary Hex ASCII Font Name Font Type Addressing Addressing Scalable Resident HG-Gothic-B Kanji √ Scalable Scalable Resident HG-Gothic-B Kanji √ Scalable Scalable Resident HG-Gothic-E Kanji √ Scalable Scalable Resident HG-Gothic-E Kanji √ Scalable Scalable Non-Resident User defined √ (download) Scalable Non-Resident (download) User defined Code Pages EUC, JIS, SJIS, UC EUC, JIS, SJIS, UC EUC, JIS, SJIS EUC, JIS, SJIS √ Not all fonts contain an entire compliment of character codes for a given character map. Gothic E is available only on E-Class and non-display M-Class printers. Sample Kanji Gothic B DPL file (binary addressing) and the resulting label: 208 Class Series Programmer’s Manual Appendix Q – ILPC Programming Examples <02>L D11 ySPM 1911S0003100010P020P015Scalable Kanji Gothic B Available 1B110000020017001234567890 yUJS 1X1100001900010b0392011000020002 112200002800030JIS CHARACTER’S IN ALL 4 ROTATION’S 112200002600030Rotation 1 1911U4002650150P012P012<4D><3F><21><21><21><21><4D><4F><21><21><21><21><4D><5F><21><21> <21><21><4D><6F><00><00> 112200002400030Rotation 2 2911U4002600150P012P012<4D><3F><00><00> 2911U4002600205P012P012<4D><4F><00><00> 2911U4002600250P012P012<4D><5F><00><00> 2911U4002600300P012P012<4D><6F><00><00> 112200002200030Rotation 3 3911U4002330315P012P012<4D><6F><21><21><21><21><4D><5F><21><21><21><21><4D><4F><21><21> <21><21><4D><3F><00><00> 112200002000030Rotation 4 4911U4001950165P012P012<4D><3F><00><00> 4911U4001950215P012P012<4D><4F><00><00> 4911U4001950265P012P012<4D><5F><00><00> 4911U4001950315P012P012<4D><6F><00><00> 1X1100001100010b0392007500020002 112200001650030SCALING JIS CHARACTER’S 1911U4001200020P010P020<21><6F><00><00> 1911U4001200050P020P020<21><6F><00><00> 1911U4001200080P030P020<21><6F><00><00> 1911U4001200110P040P020<21><6F><00><00> 1911U4001200145P040P030<21><6F><00><00> 1911U4001200190P040P040<21><6F><00><00> 1911U4001200250P040P050<21><6F><00><00> 1911U4001200320P040P060<21><6F><00><00> 112200000050010NORMAL INVERSE 112200000050245 NORMAL MIRROR 1911U4000250010P040P040<21><6F><00><00> 1911U4000250245P040P040<4B><30><00><00> A5 1911U4000250090P040P040<21><6F><00><00> A1 M 1911U4000250390P040P040<4B><30><00><00> M E þ Note: The notation “” in this DPL file should be interpreted by the reader as representing the hexadecimal value of the byte sent to the printer. Class Series Programmer’s Manual 209 Appendix Q – ILPC Programming Examples Sample Kanji Gothic E DPL file (Hex-ASCII addressing) and resulting label: <02>L D11 ySPM 1911S0003100010P020P015Scalable Kanji Gothic E Available 1B110000020017001234567890 yUJS 1X1100001900010b0392011000020002 112200002800030JIS CHARACTER’S IN ALL 4 ROTATION’S 112200002600030Rotation 1 1911uK102650150P012P0124D3F212121214D4F212121214D5F212121214D6F 112200002400030Rotation 2 2911uK102600150P012P0124D3F 2911uK102600205P012P0124D4F 2911uK102600250P012P0124D5F 2911uK102600300P012P0124D6F 112200002200030Rotation 3 3911uK102330315P012P0124D6F212121214D5F212121214D4F212121214D3F 112200002000030Rotation 4 4911uK101950165P012P0124D3F 4911uK101950215P012P0124D4F 4911uK101950265P012P0124D5F 4911uK101950315P012P0124D6F 1X1100001100010b0392007500020002 112200001650030SCALING JIS CHARACTER’S 1911uK101200020P010P020216F 1911uK101200050P020P020216F 1911uK101200080P030P020216F 1911uK101200110P040P020216F 1911uK101200145P040P030216F 1911uK101200190P040P040216F 1911uK101200250P040P050216F 1911uK101200320P040P060216F 112200000050010NORMAL INVERSE 112200000050245 NORMAL MIRROR 1911uK100250010P040P040216F 1911uK100250245P040P0404B30 A5 1911uK100250090P040P040216F A1 M 1911uK100250390P040P0404B30 M E 210 Class Series Programmer’s Manual Appendix Q – ILPC Programming Examples ILPC-CHINESE Option The Chinese Option is a double byte scalable font supporting Simplified GB Chinese. In the double byte format the printer recalls one character printed from every two 8-bit bytes sent from the host. Double byte scalable fonts are selected using a print format record (see Generating Label Formats and Appendix H for details). DPL Big 5 Encoding Support: With the ILPC Chinese option, the printer firmware supports font files that are encoded for the GB Character Map and the Big 5 Character Map. The resident Asian font in the printer is encoded in the GB Character Map. To utilize the Big 5 Character Map, the user must download a font file that is Big 5 encoded. The font file downloaded must be of a size compatible with the internal module size available or of a size compatible with an external (plug in) module where applicable. Printing characters from the Big 5 encoded font file is accomplished by: 1. Setting the character mapping with a System Command or Label Format Command (yUB5 or yUB5, respectively). 2. Setting the ‘b’ field = ‘9’ and ‘eee’ field = ‘Unn’, where ‘nn’ is equal to the Font ID number selected for the Big 5 encoded font file downloaded. 3. Selecting string data corresponding to the Big 5 Character Map. eee (Font Code) UC0 uc0 U50 U5z... U90 - U9z u50 - u5z… u90 - u9z U50 U5z... U90 - U9z u50 - u5z… u90 - u9z Scalable Double-Byte Font Map - CHINESE Scalable Font Binary Hex ASCII Code Font Type Name Addressing Addressing Pages Scalable Resident Simplified GB √ GB Chinese GB Scalable Resident Simplified √ GB Chinese Scalable Non-Resident (download) Big 5 B5 √ √ Scalable Non-Resident (download) Big 5 Scalable Non-Resident (download) User defined B5 √ – Scalable Non-Resident (download) User defined √ – Sample Simplified GB Chinese DPL file (binary addressing) and resulting label: <02>L D11 ySPM 1911S0003100010P020P015Scalable Chinese Available in GB Character Set 1B110000020017001234567890 yUGB 1X1100001900010b0392011000020002 112200002800030GB CHARACTER’S IN ALL 4 ROTATION’S 112200002600030Rotation 1 1911UC002650150P012P012A1> <00><00> 112200002400030Rotation 2 Class Series Programmer’s Manual 211 Appendix Q – ILPC Programming Examples 2911UC002600150P012P012<00><00> 2911UC002600205P012P012<00><00> 2911UC002600250P012P012<00><00> 2911UC002600300P012P012<00><00> 112200002200030Rotation 3 3911UC002330315P012P012 <00><00> 112200002000030Rotation 4 4911UC001950165P012P012<00><00> 4911UC001950215P012P012<00><00> 4911UC001950265P012P012<00><00> 4911UC001950315P012P012<00><00> 1X1100001100010b0392007500020002 112200001650030SCALING GB CHARACTER’S 1911UC001200020P010P020<00><00> 1911UC001200050P020P020<00><00> 1911UC001200080P030P020<00><00> 1911UC001200110P040P020<00><00> 1911UC001200145P040P030<00><00> 1911UC001200190P040P040<00><00> 1911UC001200250P040P050<00><00> 1911UC001200320P040P060<00><00> 112200000050010NORMAL INVERSE 112200000050245 NORMAL MIRROR 1911UC000250010P040P040<00><00> 1911UC000250245P040P040<00><00> A5 1911UC000250090P040P040<00><00> A1 M 1911UC000250390P040P040<00><00> M E þ Note: The notation “” in this DPL file should be interpreted by the reader as representing the hexadecimal value of the byte sent to the printer. 212 Class Series Programmer’s Manual Appendix Q – ILPC Programming Examples ILPC-KOREAN Option The Korean Option is a double-byte scalable font supporting Korean Hangul. In the double-byte format, the printer recalls one character printed from every two 8-bit bytes sent from the host. Double-byte scalable fonts are selected using a print format record (see Generating Label Formats and Appendix H for details). eee (Font Code) UH0 uh0 u50 u5z… u90 - u9z U50 U5z... U90 - U9z Scalable Double-Byte Font Map - KOREAN Scalable Binary Font Name Font Type Addressing Scalable Resident Korean Hangul √ Scalable Resident Korean Hangul Scalable Non-Resident User defined (download) Scalable Non-Resident (download) User defined Hex ASCII Addressing √ √ Code Pages UC UC √ þ Note: Not all fonts contain an entire compliment of character codes for a given character map. Sample Korean Hangul DPL file (binary addressing) and the resulting label: <02>L D11 ySPM 1911S0003100010P020P015Scalable Korean Available in UC Character Set yUUC 1B110000020017001234567890 1X1100001900010b0392011000020002 112200002800030HANGUL CHARACTER’S IN ALL 4 ROTATIONS 112200002600030Rotation 1 1911UH002620150P012P012<00><00><00> 1911UH002620205P012P012<65><00><00> 1911UH002620250P012P012<69><00><00> 1911UH002620300P012P012<00><00> 112200002400030Rotation 2 2911UH002550150P012P012<00><00><00> 2911UH002550205P012P012<65><00><00> 2911UH002550250P012P012<69><00><00> 2911UH002550300P012P012<00><00> 112200002200030Rotation 3 3911UH002330165P012P012<00><00><00> 3911UH002330220P012P012<65><00><00> 3911UH002330265P012P012<69><00><00> 3911UH002330315P012P012<00><00> 112200002000030Rotation 4 4911UH001950165P012P012<00><00><00> 4911UH001950215P012P012<65><00><00> 4911UH001950265P012P012<69><00><00> 4911UH001950315P012P012<00><00> 1X1100001100010b0392007500020002 112200001650030SCALING HANGUL CHARACTERS 1911UH001200020P010P020<00><00> 1911UH001200050P020P020<00><00> 1911UH001200080P030P020<00><00> Class Series Programmer’s Manual 213 Appendix Q – ILPC Programming Examples 1911UH001200110P040P020<00><00> 1911UH001200145P040P030<00><00> 1911UH001200190P040P040<00><00> 1911UH001200250P040P050<00><00> 1911UH001200320P040P060<00><00> 112200000200010NORMAL INVERSE 112200000200245 NORMAL MIRROR 1911UH000450010P040P040<4D><00><00> 1911UH000450245P040P040<15><00><00> A5 1911UH000450090P040P040<4D><00><00> A1 M 1911UH000450390P040P040<15><00><00> M E þ Note: The notation “” in this DPL file should be interpreted by the reader as representing the hexadecimal value of the byte sent to the printer. 214 Class Series Programmer’s Manual Appendix Plug and Play IDs MFG:Datamax; CMD:DPL; MDL:I4208; CLS:PRINTER; DES:Datamax 4208 Label Printer Version 06.06 07/09/2001 Where: CMD = Fixed string “DPL” MDL = Model (valid MDLs are A4212, A4310, A4408, A4606, A6212, A6310, E4203, E4204, E4304, M4206, M4208, M4306, I4206, I4208, I4308, I4210, I4212, I4406, I4604, W6308, W6208 & W8306) CLS = Fixed string “PRINTER” DES = Description (subject to change with the application [firmware] revision and printer model) Class Series Programmer’s Manual 215 Appendix R – Plug and Play IDs 216 Class Series Programmer’s Manual Appendix Bar Code Symbology Information Sources AIM International, Inc. 11860 Sunrise Valley Drive, Suite 101 Reston, VA 22091 USA Tel: 703-391-7621 Fax: 703-391-7624 Automotive Industry Action Group 26200 Lahser Road Suite 200 Southfield, MI 48034 USA Tel: 313-358-3570 Fax: 313-358-3253 AIM JAPAN Aios Gotanda Bldg. 6F 1-10-7 Higashigotanda Shinagawa-ku Tokyo 141 Japan Tel: 03-3440-9085 Fax: 03-3440-9086 Computing Technology Industry Association 450 E. 22 Street Suite 230 Lombard, IL 60148-6158 USA Tel: 630 268-1818 Fax: 630 278-1384 AIM EUROPE The Old Vicarage Haley Hill, Halifax HX3 6DR West Yorkshire, England Tel: 44-1422-359161 Fax: 44-1422-3556904 Health Industry Business Communications Council PO Box 53528 Phoenix, AZ 85018 USA Tel 602-318-1091 AIM UK The Old Vicarage Haley Hill, Halifax HX3 6DR United Kingdom Tel: 44-1422-359161 Fax: 44-1422-355604 International Article Numbering Association (EAN) Rue Royal 29 B-1000 Bruxelles Belgium Tel: 32-22-187674 Fax: 32-22-187585 AIM USA 634 Alpha Drive Pittsburgh, PA 15238-2802 USA Tel: 412-963-8588 Fax: 412-963-8753 Uniform Code Council, Inc. (UCC) 8163 Old Yankee Rd. Suite J Dayton, OH 45458 USA Tel: 513-435-3870 Fax: 513-435-4749 American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 11 West 42nd Street New York, New York 10036 USA Tel: 212-642-4900 Fax: 212-398-0023 U.S. Government Printing Office 732 North Capitol Street NW Washington, DC 20401 USA Tel: 202-512-1991 Fax: 202-512-1293 Class Series Programmer’s Manual 217 Appendix S – Barcode Symbology Information Sources 218 Class Series Programmer’s Manual Glossary alphanumeric Consisting of alphabetic, numeric, punctuation and other symbols. backing material The silicon-coated paper carrier material to which labels with adhesive backing are affixed. Also referred to as “liner”. bar code A representation of alphanumeric information in a pattern of machine-readable marks. The basic categories are divided into one-dimensional (UPC, Code 39, Postnet, etc.) and twodimensional bar codes (Data Matrix, MaxiCode, PDF417, etc.). boot loader The resident program that loads the application from Flash memory, decompresses it into the DRAM, and starts operations. burn line The row of thermal elements in the printhead that create the images on the media. calibration The process through which Media Sensor readings are entered into the printer for correct sensor function (for example, detection of a given media type) and top of form positioning. character set The entire complement of alphanumeric symbols contained in a given font. checksum An alphanumeric error detection method used in many bar code symbologies for informational security. continuous media An uninterrupted roll or box of label or tag stock media that contains no gap, slit, notch, or black mark to separate individual labels or tags. cutter A mechanical device with a rotary or guillotine type blade used to cut labels or tags following printing. defaults The functional setting values returned following a factory reset of the printer. diagnostics Programs used to locate and diagnose hardware problems. die-cut media Media that has been cut into a pattern using a press, where the excess paper is removed leaving individual labels, with gaps between them, attached to a backing material. direct thermal The printing method that uses a heat sensitive media and only the heat of the thermal printhead to create an image on the label. direct thermal media Media coated with special chemicals that react and darken with the application of heat. DPI (dots per inch) A measurement of print resolution, rated in the number of thermal elements contained in one inch of the printhead. Also referred to as “resolution.” Class Series Programmer’s Manual 219 Glossary DPL (Datamax Programming Language) programming commands used specifically for control of and label production in Datamax printers. fan-fold Media that is folded and stacked. feed speed The rate at which the media moves under the printhead in non-printed areas and between labels. Flash memory Non-volatile memory (does not require printer power to maintain data) that can be erased and reprogrammed, used to hold the printer’s operating program. font A set of alphanumeric characters that share a particular typeface. gap A space between die-cut or notched labels used to sense the top-of-form. IPS (inches per second) Imperial measurement of printer speeds. label A paper or synthetic printing material, typically with a pressure sensitive adhesive backing. label length The distance from the top of the label to the bottom of the label as it exits the printer. label repeat The distance from the top of one label to the top of the next label. label tracking Excessive lateral (side to side) movement of the media as it travels under the printhead. label width The left to right measurement of the label as it exits the printer. media Generalized term for all types of printing stocks, including: roll fed, continuous, butt-cut, die-cut, reflective, and fanfold. media hub Device in the printer used to support roll media. media sensor An electronic device equipped with photosensors to detect media and the top-of-form on die-cut, notched or reflective media. MMPS (millimeters per second) Metric measurement of printer speeds. notched stock Media, typically tag stock, with holes or notches in the material that is used to signal the top-of-form. The printer must be set to ‘gap’ to use this media type. perforation Small cuts extending through the backing and/or label material to facilitate their separation. Also referred to as “perf”. preprinted media Label stock that contains borders, text, or graphics, floodcoating, etc. present sensor An electronic sensor that provides a signal to the printer firmware that a label is present, typically located beyond the printhead, where the labels exits the printer. print speed The rate at which the media moves under the printhead during the printing process. 220 Class Series Programmer’s Manual Glossary reflective media Media imprinted with carbon-based black marks on the underside of the material, which is used to signal the top-of-form when the ‘reflective’ Media Sensor is enabled. registration Repeatable top to bottom alignment of printed labels. reverse speed The backward rate of media motion into the printer during tear-off, peel and present and cutting operations for positioning the label at the start of print position. ribbon An extruded polyester tape with several layers of material, one of which is ink-like, used to produce an image on the label. Also referred to as “foil”. roll media A form of media that is wound upon a cardboard core. start of print The position on the label where the printing actually begins. tag stock A heavy paper or synthetic printing material, typically featuring a notch or black mark for top of form and no adhesive backing. thermal transfer The printing method that creates an image by transferring ink from a ribbon onto the media using the heat from the thermal printhead. TOF (top-of-form) The start of a new label as indicated by a label gap, notch, mark or programming. Class Series Programmer’s Manual 221 Glossary 222 Class Series Programmer’s Manual

Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Create Date                     : 2004:01:28 10:27:40Z
Modify Date                     : 2004:01:28 11:58:26-05:00
Page Count                      : 236
Creation Date                   : 2004:01:28 10:27:40Z
Author                          : jheck
Producer                        : Acrobat PDFWriter 5.0 for Windows NT
Mod Date                        : 2004:01:28 11:58:26-05:00
Metadata Date                   : 2004:01:28 11:58:26-05:00
Title                           : Class Series pgrman, 88-2316-01 revC.doc
Creator                         : jheck
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu